Samsung CLX-9201 Series, CLX-9201NA, CLX-9201ND, CLX-9251 Series, CLX-9251NA, CLX-9251ND, CLX-9301 Series, CLX-9301NA Service Manual

A3 Color Copier

CLX-9201/9251/9301 series

CLX-9201ND/NA,

CLX-9251ND/NA, CLX-9301NA

(Ver 3.2)

SERVICE MANUAL

A3 Color Copier Contents

1. Precautions

2. Product Specifications and Description

3. Disassembly and Reassembly

4. Troubleshooting

5. System Diagram

6. Reference Information

Refer to the service manual in the GSPN (see the rear cover) for more information.

Contents

Contents

i

1.

Precautions ........................................................................................................................................1 − 1

1.1.

Safety warning ..........................................................................................................................1 − 1

1.2.

Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................1 − 2

1.2.1.

Toxic material...............................................................................................................1 − 2

1.2.2.

Electric shock and fire safety precautions ...........................................................................1 − 2

1.2.3.

Handling precautions .....................................................................................................1 − 4

1.2.4.

Assembly and Disassembly precautions .............................................................................1 − 4

1.2.5.

Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ..............................................................1 − 5

1.3.

ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................1 − 6

2.

Product Specifications and Description ....................................................................................................2 − 1

2.1.

Product Overview ......................................................................................................................2 − 1

2.2.

Specifications............................................................................................................................2 − 2

2.2.1.

General Specification .....................................................................................................2 − 2

2.2.2.

Print Specifications ........................................................................................................2 − 3

2.2.3.

Controller and Software specification ................................................................................2 − 6

2.2.4.

Scan specification ........................................................................................................ 2 − 10

2.2.5.

Copy specification ....................................................................................................... 2 − 12

2.2.6.

Fax specification ......................................................................................................... 2 − 14

2.2.7.

Paper Handling specification.......................................................................................... 2 − 18

2.2.8.

Supplies..................................................................................................................... 2 − 21

2.2.9.

Maintenance Parts ....................................................................................................... 2 − 21

2.2.10.

Option....................................................................................................................... 2 − 22

2.3.

Machine External View............................................................................................................. 2 − 24

2.4.

Feeding System ....................................................................................................................... 2 − 28

2.4.1.

Feeding System Overview............................................................................................. 2 − 28

2.4.2.

Main Components and functions .................................................................................... 2 − 29

2.4.3.

Cassette (Tray 1,2,3,4).................................................................................................. 2 − 33

2.4.4.

Pick-Up Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 34

2.4.5.

Registration Unit ......................................................................................................... 2 − 35

2.4.6.

MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit ................................................................................... 2 − 36

2.5.

Image Creation........................................................................................................................ 2 − 37

2.5.1.

Printing process overview ............................................................................................. 2 − 37

2.5.2.

Imaging Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 38

2.5.2.1.

Imaging Unit Overview .................................................................................. 2 − 38

2.5.2.2.

Drum drive .................................................................................................. 2 − 39

2.5.2.3.

Developer Unit ............................................................................................. 2 − 40

2.5.3.

ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit.............................................................................. 2 − 42

2.5.3.1.

ITB Unit overview ........................................................................................ 2 − 42

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents

2.5.3.2.

Transfer belt drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 43

2.5.3.3.

Transfer belt cleaning..................................................................................... 2 − 44

2.6.

Fuser unit ............................................................................................................................... 2 − 45

2.6.1.

Fuser unit overview ..................................................................................................... 2 − 45

2.6.2.

Fuser Unit drive .......................................................................................................... 2 − 46

2.6.3.

Fuser unit temperature control........................................................................................ 2 − 47

2.7.

Laser scanning unit (LSU) ......................................................................................................... 2 − 48

2.7.1.

LSU overview............................................................................................................. 2 − 48

2.7.2.

Laser Scanning Optical path .......................................................................................... 2 − 49

2.7.3.

Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................ 2 − 50

2.7.4.

Automatic line position adjustment ................................................................................. 2 − 51

2.7.5.

Shutter Mechanism ...................................................................................................... 2 − 54

2.8.

Drive System .......................................................................................................................... 2 − 55

2.8.1.

Drive Motors .............................................................................................................. 2 − 55

2.8.2.

Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS/ENG) ........................................................... 2 − 57

2.8.3.

Pick Up Drive............................................................................................................. 2 − 58

2.8.4.

Regi/ MP Drive........................................................................................................... 2 − 59

2.8.5.

Feed Drive ................................................................................................................. 2 − 60

2.8.6.

Fuser/Exit Drive.......................................................................................................... 2 − 61

2.8.7.

Waste Toner Container Drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 62

2.8.8.

Toner Supply Drive...................................................................................................... 2 − 62

2.9.

Scanner System ....................................................................................................................... 2 − 63

2.9.1.

Scanner System Overview............................................................................................. 2 − 63

2.9.2.

Scanning System Components ....................................................................................... 2 − 63

2.10. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)................................................................................ 2 − 66

2.10.1.

DADF overview.......................................................................................................... 2 − 66

2.10.2.

Electrical parts location ................................................................................................ 2 − 67

2.10.3.

DADF Drive System .................................................................................................... 2 − 68

2.10.3.1. DADF Original Drive Assembly ...................................................................... 2 − 69

2.10.3.2. DADF Registration (Regi) Drive Assembly........................................................ 2 − 70

2.10.3.3. DADF Feed Drive Assembly ........................................................................... 2 − 70

2.10.3.4. DADF Exit Drive Assembly............................................................................ 2 − 71

2.10.3.5. Original Return Drive .................................................................................... 2 − 71

2.11. Hardware Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2 − 72

2.11.1.

Main Controller .......................................................................................................... 2 − 75

2.11.2.

Operation Panel (OPE) controller ................................................................................... 2 − 79

2.11.3.

ADF PBA .................................................................................................................. 2 − 82

2.11.4.

SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) board .................................................................. 2 − 83

2.11.5.

Fuser Drive Board (FDB).............................................................................................. 2 − 85

2.11.6.

HVPS board ............................................................................................................... 2 − 86


ii

Contents

2.11.7.

Eraser PBA ................................................................................................................ 2 − 87

2.11.8.

Fuser PBA ................................................................................................................. 2 − 87

2.11.9.

Waste Sensor PBA....................................................................................................... 2 − 88

2.11.10. CRUM PBA ............................................................................................................... 2 − 88

2.11.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA ............................................................................................... 2 − 88

2.11.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA .............................................................................................. 2 − 89

2.11.13. ITB Encoder PBA ....................................................................................................... 2 − 89

2.11.14. Scan Joint PBA ........................................................................................................... 2 − 90

2.11.15. Charge Coupled Device Module(CCDM) PBA.................................................................. 2 − 91

2.11.16. White-LED(WLED) CTL PBA ...................................................................................... 2 − 92

2.11.17. White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA ............................................................................ 2 − 92

2.12. DCF Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2 − 93

2.13. Finisher ................................................................................................................................. 2 − 99

2.14. Wireless LAN Option ............................................................................................................. 2 − 102

3.

Disassembly and Reassembly ................................................................................................................3 − 1

3.1.

Precautions when replacing parts ..................................................................................................3 − 1

3.1.1.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling .................................................................3 − 1

3.1.2.

Precautions when handling PBA.......................................................................................3 − 1

3.1.3.

Releasing Plastic Latches ................................................................................................3 − 2

3.2.

Maintenance .............................................................................................................................3 − 3

3.2.1.

Machine Cleaning for maintenance ...................................................................................3 − 3

3.2.1.1.

Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window...............................................................3 − 3

3.2.1.2.

Cleaning the LSU window ................................................................................3 − 4

3.2.1.3.

Cleaning the transfer roller ................................................................................3 − 5

3.2.1.4.

Cleaning the scan glass.....................................................................................3 − 5

3.2.2.

Replacing the maintenance part ........................................................................................3 − 6

3.2.2.1.

Drum Unit .....................................................................................................3 − 6

3.2.2.2.

Developer Unit ...............................................................................................3 − 7

3.2.2.3.

ITB Cleaner ...................................................................................................3 − 9

3.2.2.4.

ITB Unit........................................................................................................3 − 9

3.2.2.5.

Fuser unit .................................................................................................... 3 − 11

3.2.2.6.

Transfer roller............................................................................................... 3 − 11

3.2.2.7.

Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller ..................................................................... 3 − 12

3.2.2.8.

MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller................................................................. 3 − 13

3.2.2.9.

DADF Pick-up roller Assy .............................................................................. 3 − 14

3.2.2.10. DADF friction pad ........................................................................................ 3 − 14

3.3.

Replacing the main SVC part ..................................................................................................... 3 − 15

3.3.1.

Left Cover.................................................................................................................. 3 − 15

3.3.2.

Rear Cover................................................................................................................. 3 − 15

3.3.3.

HVPS board ............................................................................................................... 3 − 16 iii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents

3.3.4.

Temperature Sensor ..................................................................................................... 3 − 16

3.3.5.

LSU.......................................................................................................................... 3 − 17

3.3.6.

OPE Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 18

3.3.7.

Main board................................................................................................................. 3 − 21

3.3.8.

SMPS Fan.................................................................................................................. 3 − 22

3.3.9.

SMPS board ............................................................................................................... 3 − 23

3.3.10.

FDB board ................................................................................................................. 3 − 23

3.3.11.

Fuser-Duct Fan ........................................................................................................... 3 − 24

3.3.12.

Main board shield........................................................................................................ 3 − 24

3.3.13.

Main Drive unit........................................................................................................... 3 − 25

3.3.14.

Fuser/Exit Drive unit.................................................................................................... 3 − 25

3.3.15.

Pick-up Drive unit ....................................................................................................... 3 − 26

3.3.16.

Feed Drive unit ........................................................................................................... 3 − 26

3.3.17.

Regi_MP Drive unit ..................................................................................................... 3 − 27

3.3.18.

Toner Supply Drive unit................................................................................................ 3 − 27

3.3.19.

Waste toner container Drive unit..................................................................................... 3 − 28

3.3.20.

Auto Size sensor ......................................................................................................... 3 − 28

3.3.21.

Exit Unit.................................................................................................................... 3 − 29

3.3.22.

Side Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 30

3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor ............................................................................................ 3 − 31

3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor ......................................................................... 3 − 32

3.3.22.3. MP unit ....................................................................................................... 3 − 33

3.3.23.

Fuser unit................................................................................................................... 3 − 37

3.3.24.

Pick-up Unit and sensor ................................................................................................ 3 − 40

3.3.25.

Feed sensor ................................................................................................................ 3 − 40

3.3.26.

Feed Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 41

3.3.27.

Registration Unit ......................................................................................................... 3 − 42

3.3.28.

DADF Unit ................................................................................................................ 3 − 43

3.3.28.1. DADF Cover................................................................................................ 3 − 44

3.3.28.2. DADF Open Cover........................................................................................ 3 − 46

3.3.28.3. DADF Stacker .............................................................................................. 3 − 46

3.3.28.4. DADF main board ......................................................................................... 3 − 46

3.3.28.5. DADF motor_solenoid_clutch ......................................................................... 3 − 47

3.3.28.6. DADF Regi_Cover_Detect sensor .................................................................... 3 − 49

3.3.28.7. DADF Exit Idle sensor ................................................................................... 3 − 49

3.3.28.8. DADF Exit sensor ......................................................................................... 3 − 50

3.3.28.9. DADF Length_Width sensor ........................................................................... 3 − 50

3.3.29.

Scanner Unit............................................................................................................... 3 − 51

3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board........................................................................................ 3 − 51

3.3.29.2. Scan glass .................................................................................................... 3 − 52


iv

Contents

3.3.29.3. APS sensor .................................................................................................. 3 − 53

3.3.29.4. FR module ................................................................................................... 3 − 54

3.3.29.5. Scanner Assy................................................................................................ 3 − 55

3.3.30.

Side Cover Open Switch ............................................................................................... 3 − 56

3.3.31.

Front Cover Open Switch.............................................................................................. 3 − 56

3.3.32.

Replacing the HDD...................................................................................................... 3 − 57

3.3.33.

DCF (Double Cassette Feeder) ....................................................................................... 3 − 58

3.3.33.1. DCF main board ........................................................................................... 3 − 58

3.3.33.2. DCF Feed Motor ........................................................................................... 3 − 59

3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor....................................................................................... 3 − 59

3.3.34.

Finisher ..................................................................................................................... 3 − 60

3.3.34.1. Finisher Main Motor ...................................................................................... 3 − 60

3.3.34.2. Finisher Board .............................................................................................. 3 − 63

4.

Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................4 − 1

4.1.

Control panel ............................................................................................................................4 − 1

4.1.1.

Introducing the display screen and useful buttons ................................................................4 − 2

4.2.

Understanding the status LED ......................................................................................................4 − 4

4.3.

Updating Firmware ....................................................................................................................4 − 5

4.3.1.

Updating from the Printer Control Panel ............................................................................4 − 5

4.3.2.

Updating from the Network ............................................................................................4 − 7

4.4.

Service Mode (Tech Mode)........................................................................................................ 4 − 10

4.4.1.

Entering/Exiting Service Mode ...................................................................................... 4 − 10

4.4.2.

Service Mode Menu Tree ............................................................................................. 4 − 11

4.4.3.

Information ................................................................................................................ 4 − 15

4.4.3.1.

General ....................................................................................................... 4 − 15

4.4.3.2.

Supply Status ............................................................................................... 4 − 15

4.4.3.3.

Software Version........................................................................................... 4 − 16

4.4.3.4.

Service Hours ............................................................................................... 4 − 16

4.4.3.5.

Fault Log..................................................................................................... 4 − 16

4.4.3.6.

Print Reports ................................................................................................ 4 − 17

4.4.3.7.

Export Reports.............................................................................................. 4 − 18

4.4.4.

Maintenance Counts..................................................................................................... 4 − 19

4.4.4.1.

Fault Count ................................................................................................. 4 − 19

4.4.4.2.

Jam Count ................................................................................................... 4 − 19

4.4.4.3.

Part Replacement Count ................................................................................. 4 − 20

4.4.4.4.

Finisher Handling Count................................................................................. 4 − 21

4.4.5.

Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 4 − 22

4.4.5.1.

Engine Diagnostics ........................................................................................ 4 − 22

4.4.5.2.

Fax Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 4 − 28

4.4.5.3.

Scanner Diagnostics....................................................................................... 4 − 30 v Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents

4.4.5.4.

Adjustment .................................................................................................. 4 − 32

4.4.5.5.

ACS (Auto Color Sensing) ............................................................................. 4 − 38

4.4.5.6.

Image Management ...................................................................................... 4 − 39

4.4.6.

Service Functions ........................................................................................................ 4 − 44

4.4.6.1.

Main Memory Clear ...................................................................................... 4 − 44

4.4.6.2.

Hard Disk Maintenance .................................................................................. 4 − 44

4.4.6.3.

Count Setting of Large Page ........................................................................... 4 − 44

4.4.6.4.

Toner Save .................................................................................................. 4 − 44

4.4.6.5.

Port ............................................................................................................ 4 − 45

4.4.6.6.

Debug Log................................................................................................... 4 − 45

4.4.6.7.

Capture Log ................................................................................................. 4 − 45

4.4.6.8.

System Recovery .......................................................................................... 4 − 47

4.4.6.9.

TR Control Mode ......................................................................................... 4 − 50

4.4.6.10. User Data Management ................................................................................. 4 − 51

4.4.7.

SFE (Special Feature Enablement) .................................................................................. 4 − 52

4.5.

Error Code and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 4 − 53

4.5.1.

Ax-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 63

4.5.2.

Cx-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 89

4.5.3.

H1-xxxx type (DCF) error code.................................................................................... 4 − 119

4.5.4.

H2-xxxx (Finisher) type error code ............................................................................... 4 − 131

4.5.5.

Mx-xxxx type error code............................................................................................. 4 − 144

4.5.6.

Sx-xxxx type error code.............................................................................................. 4 − 164

4.5.7.

U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code................................................................................... 4 − 184

4.5.8.

U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code .................................................................................... 4 − 196

4.5.9.

U3-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................. 4 − 199

4.6.

Image quality problems and solutions ........................................................................................ 4 − 204

4.6.1.

Vertical Black Band ................................................................................................... 4 − 207

4.6.2.

Vertical White Band, Light Band .................................................................................. 4 − 208

4.6.3.

Horizontal periodic Black Band or Dot .......................................................................... 4 − 210

4.6.4.

Horizontal periodic Light/Dark Band or Dot ................................................................... 4 − 211

4.6.5.

Foggy Image ............................................................................................................ 4 − 212

4.6.6.

Light Image.............................................................................................................. 4 − 213

4.6.7.

Blurred Image........................................................................................................... 4 − 214

4.6.8.

Incorrect color registration ......................................................................................... 4 − 215

4.6.9.

Uneven pitch and jitter image ...................................................................................... 4 − 216

4.6.10.

Skewed image........................................................................................................... 4 − 217

4.6.11.

Blank copy............................................................................................................... 4 − 218

4.6.12.

Poor fusing performance ............................................................................................. 4 − 219

4.6.13.

Stain on the paper back side......................................................................................... 4 − 220

4.7.

Adjusting the LSU skew error .................................................................................................. 4 − 221


vi

Contents

4.8.

Adjusting the DADF skew....................................................................................................... 4 − 223

4.9.

Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................... 4 − 224

5.

System Diagram..................................................................................................................................5 − 1

6.

Reference Information..........................................................................................................................6 − 1

6.1.

Tools for Troubleshooting............................................................................................................6 − 1

6.2.

Glossary...................................................................................................................................6 − 3

6.3.

Polaris Training Frequently Asked Questions ..................................................................................6 − 9 vii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1.

Precautions

1. Precautions

In order to prevent accidents and damages to the equipment please read the precautions listed below carefully before servicing the product and follow them closely.

1.1. Safety warning

1) Only to be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

High voltages and lasers inside this product are dangerous. This product should only be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

There are no user serviceable parts inside the product. Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the product as these could cause the product to malfunctions and create an electric shocks or fire hazards.

3) Laser Safety Statement

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for

Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC

60825-1. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.

• Wavelength: 800 nm

• Beam divergence

Paraller: 11 degrees

-

Perpendicular: 35 degrees

• Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW

WARNING

Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.

When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.

4) Lithium battery not replaceable by user


1-1

1. Precautions

1.2. Caution for safety

1.2.1. Toxic material

This product contains toxic materials that could cause illness if ingested.

1) Please keep imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder contained in the imaging unit and toner cartridge may be harmful, and if swallowed, you should contact a doctor.

1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions

Failure to follow the following instructions could cause electric shock or potentially cause a fire.

1) Use only the correct voltage, failure to do so could damage the product and potentially cause a fire or electric shock.

2) Use only the power cable supplied with the product. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause the cable to overheat and potentially cause a fire.

3) Do not overload the power socket, this could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and could lead to a fire.

4) Do not allow water or other liquids to spill into the product, this can cause electric shock. Do not allow paper clips, pins or other foreign objects to fall into the product, these could cause a short circuit leading to an electric shock or fire hazard.

5) Never touch the plugs on either end of the power cable with wet hands, this can cause electric shock. When servicing the product, remove the power plug from the wall socket.

6) Use caution when inserting or removing the power cord. When removing the power cord, grip it firmly and pull. The power cord must be inserted completely, otherwise a poor contact could cause overheating leading to a fire.

7) Take care of the power cable. Do not allow it to become twisted, bent sharply around corners or power cable may be damaged. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. If the power cable is damaged it could overheat and cause a fire. Exposed cables could cause an electric shock. Replace the damaged power cable immediately, do not reuse or repair the damaged cable. Some chemicals can attack the coating on the power cable, weakening the cover or exposing cables causing fire and shock risks.

1-2 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1.

Precautions

8) Ensure that the power sockets and plugs are not cracked or broken in any way. Any such defects should be repaired immediately. Take care not to cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the machine.

9) Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. Samsung recommends that this machine be disconnected from the power source when such weather conditions are expected. Do not touch the machine or the power cord if it is still connected to the wall socket in these weather conditions.

10) Avoid damp or dusty areas, install the product in a clean well ventilated location. Do not position the machine near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust built up inside the machine can lead to overheating and cause a fire or cause parts to rust.

11) Do not position the product in direct sunlight. This will cause the temperature inside the product to rise possibly leading to the product failing to work properly and in extreme conditions could lead to a fire.

12) Do not insert any metal objects into the machine through the ventilator fan or other part of the casing, it could make contact with a high voltage conductor inside the machine and cause an electric shock.

13) When replacing the SMPS board, please wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You can get a shock by the electric discharge.


1-3

1. Precautions

1.2.3. Handling precautions

The following instructions are for your own personal safety to avoid injury and so as not to damage the product.

1) Ensure the product is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause the product to tip or fall.

2) The product contains many rollers, gears and fans. Take great care to ensure that you do not catch your fingers, hair or clothing in any of these rotating devices.

3) Do not place any small metal objects, containers of water, chemicals or other liquids close to the product which if spilled could get into the machine and cause damage or a shock or fire hazard.

4) Do not install the machine in areas with high dust or moisture levels, beside on open window or close to a humidifier or heater. Damage could be caused to the product in such areas.

5) Do not place candles, burning cigarettes, etc on the product, These could cause a fire.

6) Ensure that the machine is installed and used in proper area to meet the temperature and humidity specifications.

• If the machine is stored at below zero Celsius for a long time, do not use the machine instantly after movement. It can malfunction. Take care of the machine storage. If the machine is stored at below zero Celsius for a long time, keep the machine at room temperature and install it.

1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions

1) Replace parts carefully and always use Samsung parts. Take care to note the exact location of parts and also cable routing before dismantling any part of the machine. Ensure all parts and cables are replaced correctly. Please carry out the following procedures before dismantling the product or replacing any parts.

2) Ensure that power is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.

3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

4) Only use approved spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature rating are correct.

5) When removing or re-fitting any parts do not use excessive force, especially when fitting screws into plastic.

6) Take care not to drop any small parts into the machine.

7) Handling of the OPC Drum

• The OPC Drum can be irreparably damaged if it exposed to light. Take care not to expose the OPC Drum either to direct sunlight or to fluorescent or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5 minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality degradation. Take extra care when servicing the product. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black bag or other lightproof container. Take care when working with the Covers (especially the top cover) open as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.

• Take care not to scratch the green surface of OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum Cartridge is scratched or touched the print quality will be compromised.


1.

Precautions

1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1) Be careful with the high temperature part.

The fuser unit works at a high temperature. Use caution when working on the printer. Wait for the fuser unit to cool down before disassembly.

2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.

When operating a printer, do not put hand or hair into the rotating parts (Paper feeding entrance, motor, fan, etc.).

If do, you can get harm.

3) When you move the printer, use safe lifting and handling techniques.

This printer is heavy. Use the lifting handles located on each side of the machine. Back injury could be caused if you do not lift carefully.

4) Ensure the printer is installed safely.

Ensure the printer is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall possibly causing personal injury or damaging the printer.

5) Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, double check that the printer is stable.


1-5

1. Precautions

1.3. ESD precautions

Certain semiconductor devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. Such components are commonly called

“Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices” or ESDs. Examples of typical ESDs are: integrated circuits, some field effect transistors, and semiconductor “chip” components. The techniques outlined below should be followed to help reduce the incidence of component damage caused by static electricity.

CAUTION

Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.

1) Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any electrostatic charge on your body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, employ a commercially available wrist strap device, which should be removed for your personal safety reasons prior to applying power to the unit under test.

2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ESDs, place the assembly on a conductive surface, such as aluminum or copper foil, or conductive foam, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup in the vicinity of the assembly.

3) Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.

4) Use only an “anti-static” solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “anti-static” can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.

5) Do not use Freon-propelled chemicals. When sprayed, these can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.

6) Do not remove a replacement ESD from its protective packaging until immediately before installing it. Most replacement ESDs are packaged with all leads shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil, or a comparable conductive material.

7) Immediately before removing the protective shorting material from the leads of a replacement ESD, touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.

8) Maintain continuous electrical contact between the ESD and the assembly into which it will be installed, until completely plugged or soldered into the circuit.

9) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ESDs. Normal motions, such as the brushing together of clothing fabric and lifting one’s foot from a carpeted floor, can generate static electricity sufficient to damage an ESD.


2. Product Specifications and Description

2. Product Specifications and Description

2.1. Product Overview

•

•

•

Printing Speed (Mono/Color)

•

CLX-9301 series

Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)

•

-

-

Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11x17)

CLX-9251 series

Up to 25ppm in A4 (25 ppm in Letter)


• CLX-9201 series

Up to 20 ppm in A4 (20 ppm in Letter)


Processor

•

Dual Core 1GHz

Memory

•

1GB DDR3 SDRAM


2-1


2.2. Specifications

Product Specifications are subject to change without notice.

2.2.1. General Specification

Item

Configuration

Temperature

Humidity

Acoustic Noise

Level (Sound

Power / Pressure)

Power Supply

Power

Consumption

Dimension (W x D x H)

Weight

Operating

Storage

Operating

Storage

Printing Simplex /

Duplex

Copying Simplex /

Duplex

•

•

Specfication

ND model : Platen cover model.

NA model : DADF model.

•

•

•

•

•

•

10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)

-20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)

20 to 80% RH

10 to 90% RH

CLX-9301 series : 50 /52 dB


CLX-9201 series : 48/ 50 dB



CLX-9201 series : 53/ 55 dB

Standby (Fuser off) 30 dB

Sleep 27 dB

Input Voltage

Europe : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%) / 4A

USA : AC 110~127V (-10%~6%) / 10A

Rated Frequency

Ready

AVG. (Normal

Operation)

Korea : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%) / 4A

50 / 60 Hz

100 Watt

800 Watt

Max/Peak

Sleep/Power Off

Set (mm)

Set (Kg)

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

< 1500 Watt max

3 Watt / 0 Watt

560 x 600 x 787.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 31 inches) (includes Platen Cover)

560 x 600 x 844.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 33.2 inches) (includes DADF)

560 x 600 x 1046.6 mm (22 x 23.6 x 41.2 inches) (includes Platen Cover,

Stand)

560 x 600 x 1106.3 mm (22 x 23.6 x 43.6 inches) (includes DADF, DCF)

Basic machine (includes developer unit) : 67.6 Kg (149 lb)

Platen Cover : 2.4 Kg (5.3 lb)

DADF : 4.9 Kg (10.8 lb)

DCF : 19.5 Kg (43 lb)

Stand : 12 Kg (26.5 lb)

Job Separator : 1.5 Kg (3.3 lb)

Inner Finisher : 8.5 Kg (18.7 lb)

Drum Unit and Toner Cartridges : 6.5 Kg (14.3 lb)


Item

Reliability &

Service


Recommended

Printing Volume

(AMPV)

Max. Monthly

Print Volume

Specfication

•

•

•

CLX-9301 series : 7,500 sheets/month



100,000 sheets/month

2.2.2. Print Specifications

Item

Engine Speed Simplex

Specification

•

•

•

•

•

CLX-9301 series

• B&W : Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)

Color : Up to 30 ppm in A4 (30 ppm in Letter)

•

B&W : Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11X17)

Color : Up to 15 ppm in A3 (15 ppm in 11X17)

•

•

CLX-9251 series

• B&W : Up to 25 ppm in A4 (25 ppm in Letter)


•



•

•

CLX-9201 series

•

B&W : Up to 20 ppm in A4 (20 ppm in Letter)


•




2-3


Item

Duplex

From Ready

FPOT (B&W and

Color)

From Sleep

Resolution

From Coldboot

Optical

Enhanced

Specification

•

•

•

CLX-9301 series

•

•

[Basic (Without 2nd EXIT)]

-

-

B&W : Up to 21 ipm in A4 (21 ipm in Letter)

Color : Up to 21 ipm in A3 (21 ipm in 11×17)


-

-

-


[With 2nd EXIT (Option)]





CLX-9251 series

• [Basic (Without 2nd EXIT)]


-

-




•

-

-

-






CLX-9201 series

•

[Basic (Without 2nd EXIT)]

-

-

-




•

-

-

-

-







•

•

•

•

•

•

CLX-9301 series : Less than 9/11 sec (B&W/Color)

CLX-9251 series : Less than 9.5/11.5 sec (B&W/Color)

CLX-9201 series : Less than 10/12.5 sec (B&W/Color)




Less than 100/100 sec (B&W/Color)

•

•

•

600 x 600 dpi

Normal : 2400*600 dpi Effective Output (600 x 600 x 2bit)

Best : 9600*600 dpi Effective Output (600 x 600 x 4bit)

High Quality : Real 1200*1200 dpi



Item

Printer Languages

Fonts

Downloadable Fonts

Secure Printing

Delayed

(Shceduled)

Printing

Print Job (with

HDD )

Proof printing

Spool

Stored Printing

Form overlays

USB Memory Direct Print

Specification

PCL5Ce, PCL6Ce, PostScript Level3C, TIFF, PDF 1.4, JPEG

PCL:93 scalable, 1 bitmap, OCR-A, OCR-B, PS:136

Yes (PCL & PS3 S/W Font)

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Jpeg, Tiff, PDF, Samsung PRN, TXT


2-5


2.2.3. Controller and Software specification

Item

Processor

DRAM

Memory Expansion

MPU

Image Processor

Std.

Max.

Specification

Chorus4N Dual Core 1GHz

Embedded in Chorus4N

1GB DDR3 SDRAM

1GB DDR3 SDRAM

N.A.

320GB HDD Standard

NOTE

HDD Partition Map

- Mandatory, 157GB for users, EXT3 file system

Storage

Printer driver

Supporting OS

Default Driver

HDD_DOC partition is available for the user data storage.

[Windows]

•

Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bit)/ 2003(32/64bit)/ Vista(32/64bit)/ 2008/ Win7/

2008 R2(64 only)

•

•

•

•

•

•

[Linux]

•

RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)

Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux 10.1 (32bit)

OpenSuSE 10.2 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64bit)

•

Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64bit)

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64bit)

Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)

[Mac]

•

Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.7

PCL6 (For Windows), PS (for Mac, Linux)


Item

Scan driver

Application


Driver feature

Specification

•

•

[Windows]

•

•

Watermark, Overlay, N-up printing, Poster printing

Duplex, Quality, Color mode (Color, Gray scale)

• Support Color spec., Device color, color management

[Mac/Linux]

•

•

N-up printing, Duplex, Quality

Color mode (Color, Gray scale)

WHQL

(Windows

Hardware Quality

Labs)

Windows 2000/ XP(include 64bit)/ 2003/ Vista/ 2008/ Win7/ 2008 R2(64 only)

Language

Localization

23 countries( Arabic/ Portuguese Brazilian/ Simplified Chinese / Traditional

Chinese/ Czech/ Danish/ Dutch/ Greek/ English/ Finnish/ French/ German/ Hebrew/

Hungarian/ Italian/ Korea/ Norweigian/ Polish/ Portuguese / Russian/ Spanish /

Swedish /Turkish)

Status Monitor

(Lite SM)

TWAIN

WIA

Supporting OS

Scan Manager

Scan Assistant

PC-FAX

Network-FAX

Samsung Easy

Printer Manager

Network

Management

HDD File

Management S/W

AnyWeb Print

SmarThru

Yes (Windows Only)

Yes

No

[Windows]

•

Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bit)/ 2003(32/64bit)/ Vista(32/64bit)/

2008(32/64bit)/ Win7/ 2008 R2(64 only)

•

•

•

•

•

•

[Linux]

RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)

Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64bit) - SuSE Linux 10.1 (32bit)

• OpenSuSE 10.2 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64bit)

Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64bit)

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64bit)

Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)

[Mac]

• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6

Yes (Win, Mac)

Yes (Win, Mac)

No

Yes (Win, Mac)

Yes (Win, Mac)

Set IP, SWAS 5.0 & SWS 2.0 SWAS Plug-In : Job Accounting, Storage management,

Cloning, Remote Install

No

Yes

Smarthru Office, SmarThru Workflow(Optional)


2-7


■ Interface

Item

Parallel (IEEE 1284)

USB

Type A, Host

Type B, Device

Wired LAN

Wireless LAN

Foreign Device Interface

Specification

No

High-Speed USB 2.0 Host (2-port)

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Peripheral (1-port)

Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX

No

Optional

■ Network Interface

Item

Network OS

TCP/IP

Network Protocols

IP Addressing

IPX/SPX

Ether Talk

NetBIOS over

TCP/IP

Others

Static IP

Auto IP

BOOTP

DHCP

Specification

•

Microsoft Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bits)/ 2003(32/64bits)/ Vista(32/64bits)/

Win7

[Mac]

• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6

•

•

•

•

[Linux]

RedHat 8 ~ 9

Fedora Core 1~4

Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1

SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2

[Novell]

•

Netware 5.x, 6.x(TCP/IP Only)

[Others]

•

Unix(HP-UX,Solaris,SunOS, SCO)

TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP, SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS,WINS,

SLP, Bonjour, SSDP,DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,IPv6

No

No

Yes

HTTPS, LDAPS, IPSec, 802.1x

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes



■ Memory (HDD) Management

Item

Box Management

Document

Management

Memory to

Memory to Print

Setting

Image Overwrite

Data Encrytion

Copies

Duplex Printing

Color Mode

Autofit

Paper Supply

Binding Space

Erase Edge

Immediate

On-Demand

Supported Job

Type

Cryptography

Key length

Type

Stored Job Type

Max. Number of

Boxes

Box Size

Creation

Rename

Move & Copy

Delete

Search

Display detail information

Select

Specification

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Auto Delete Time

Setting

Email

Client

No

Yes

Yes i-Fax

Server

No

Yes

Multi Destination No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1-50mm left, right, top, bottom (PC Print only)

No

Yes

Yes

Print / Copy / Scan / Fax

AES

256bit


2-9


2.2.4. Scan specification

Item

Scan method

Compatibility

Color Mode

Scan Speed

Resolution

Halftone

Scan Size

Scan Depth

Multi-page Scan

Scan-to

Address Book

B/W (Lineart,

Halftone)

Gray

Color

Optical

Enhanced

Specification

Color CCDM-MMT

TWAIN(N/W)

Mono / Gray / Color

ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF standard)

PC scan : 15 sec @300dpi (P4-3GHz, 1G, NW 100M, A4 LEF Standard)

ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF Standard)


ScanToEmail/SMB/FTP : 45ipm @ 300dpi (A4 LEF Standard)


600 x 600 ppi

4,800 x 4,800 ppi

256 levels

Max. Document

Width

Effective Scan

Width

Max. Document

Length

Color

Max.297mm (11.7")

Max 291mm

Max.432mm

Mono

•

•

24 bits

1bit for Linearity & Halftone

8Bits for Gray scale

Platen & DADF

Yes (Shared Folder) HDD

USB

Email

Client

SMB

Yes

Yes

Yes (N/W)

Yes

FTP

HTTP(S)

Yes

No

WebDAV No

Multi Destination No

User Based Individual (Fax+Email+Server) : 500

Email, Fax, Server

Group : (Fax+Email) : 499

Searching

Basic Feature

Editing

Deleting

Grouping import, export


Item

Scan Setting

Specification

Mixed Document Yes

Scan Preset No

Delayed Send

Job Done notice

Recent

OCR

Job Build

Book Scan

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No



2-11


2.2.5. Copy specification

Item

Copy Speed

(DADF)

Zoom Range

Multi Copy

Original Type

SDMC (Single

Document

Multiple Copy)

MDMC (Multiple

Document

Multiple Copy)

From Ready

FCOT (B&W and

Color)

From Sleep

From Coldboot

Text

Text/Photo

Magazine

Photo

Copied Original

•

•

•

•

•

•

Specification

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

CLX-9301 series

• B&W Simplex: up to 30 cpm in A4 & Letter

Color Simplex: up to 30 cpm in A4 & Letter

•

B&W Duplex: up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter

Color Duplex: up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter

•

•

CLX-9251 series

• B&W Simplex: up to 25 cpm in A4 & Letter

Color Simplex: up to 25 cpm in A4 & Letter

•



CLX-9201 series

•

B&W Simplex: up to 20 cpm in A4 & Letter

• Color Simplex: up to 20 cpm in A4 & Letter

•

•



CLX-9301 series

•

•

Simplex-to-Duplex(1-2): up to 21 cpm in A4 & Letter

Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 16 cpm in A4 & Letter

CLX-9251 series

•

•


Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 16 cpm in A4 & Lette

CLX-9201 series

•


• Duplex -to-Duplex(2-2): up to 14 cpm in A4 & Letter

CLX-9301 series : Less than 6/8 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)


CLX-9201 series : Less than 7.5/8.5 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)




Less than 100/100 seconds (from platen, B&W/Color)

25% ~ 400% in 1% increments (Platen/DADF)

1~9999

•

•

Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

DADF : Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

•

•

Platen: Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

DADF : Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

•

•

No

•

•







Item

Original Type

Color Setting

Max. Original Size

Basic Copy

Other Features

Map

Light Original

Factory Default

Auto Color

Full Color

Twin Color

Single Color

B&W

Platen

DADF

Specification

•

•



•

•

Platen: Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

DADF : Scan 600 x 600dpi, Printing 600 x 600 x 2bit

Color Copy Text/Photo (Mixed) Mode

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")

297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")

Multi Copy

Automatic Paper

Selection

Manual Paper

Selection

Multi-page Copy

1~9999

Yes

Yes

Duplex Copy

Platen & DADF

Using Platen

•

•

1→1Sided

1→2Sided (Output : Book, Calendar)

Using DADF

•

•

1→1Sided

1→2Sided (Output: Book, Calendar)

•

•

2→1Sided (Original: Book, Calendar)

2→2Sided (Original: Book, Calendar, Output: Book, Calendar)

Darkness Control 11 Levels

Collation Copy Yes

Reduce & Enlarge

* Zoom Range : 25% to 400% in Platen and DADF

* Preset: [Original(100%)] [Auto Fit] … 25%, 50%, 150%, 200%, 400%

[Custom:25-400%)]

Proof Copy

N-Up

ID Card Copy

No

2up ~ 32 up

Yes (Platen only)

Poster Copy

Clone Copy

(Image Repeat)

Booklet

Covers

Transparencies

Book Copy

No

No

No

Yes

No

Yes (Platen only)

Scan to Document No


2-13


Item

Image

Margin Shift

Specification

No

Book Center Erase Yes

Form Copy

Watermark Copy

Stamp

Job Program

Adjust

Background

Job Build

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Auto, Erase(4 levels), Enhance(2 levels)

Rotation Copy

Mirror

Yes

No

No

2.2.6. Fax specification

Item

Compatibility

Communication System

Modem Speed

TX Speed

Compression

Color Fax

ECM

Resolution (Mono)

Std

Fine

S.Fine Photo

S.Fine

Ultra Fine

Scan speed

Telephone

Features

Std

Fine

S.Fine

Handset

On hook Dial

Search

Speed Dial

Group Dial

TAD I/F

Tone/Pulse

Pause

Auto Redial

Redial

2-14

Specification

ITU-T G3, Super G3

PSTN/PABX

33.6 Kbps

3 sec (Mono/Standard/ECM-MMR, ITU-T G3 No.1 Chart,A4)

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG

Yes

Yes

203*98 dpi

203*196 dpi

No

300*300 dpi

600*600 dpi

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1.5sec/LTR

4sec/LTR

Depends on Document

No

Yes

Yes (Phone Book)

500 locations

Max. 100 Groups (Max. locations per 1 Group : 100 locations)

Yes


Item

Functions

Address Book

Basic Feature

Address Book

Advanced

Distinctive Ring

Caller ID

External Phone

Interface

Mail Box

Voice Request

TTI

RTI

Polling

Specification

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Earth/Recall

Auto Reduction

SMS

Multi-send

Delayed Send

Memory RX

Yes

Yes

Secure Rx Yes

Time Secured Fax Yes

Relay

Transmission

(ITU-T Mail Box)

No

Priority

Transmission

Batch

Transmission

No

Yes

No

Same as Group Dial Capacity.

No

No

Searching

Storing

Editing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Deleting

Grouping

Chaining import, export

Search condition

Favorites Button

Curent Sending

, Receiving Tel number

LDAP

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes(Curent Sending )

Yes



2-15


Item

Sending fax

Management

Fax Receiving

Feature/ Printing the Rx Document

Report & List Print out

Sound Control

System Data List

Ring Volume

Key Volume

Speaker

Alarm Volume

Junk Fax barrier

Security Receive

Battery Backup

Send

Duplex

Receive Mode

Battery Backup

Fax Forward to FAX

Fax Forward to e-mail

Broadcasting

Cover page

Receive

Check the Success or Fail & Error

Re-Faxing from memory in case of failed Fax

Re-Faxing in case of failed page.

Delete in memory after sending completely

Separator Sheet

Insert the stamp

Number of Printing

Copies

Revers order printing tray selection

Tx/Rx Journal

Confirmation

Auto Dial List

Specification

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes(Option -On,Off) Rx Time ,ID, Page

No

No

Yes

Yes

2 type(Image TCR or w/o Image TCR)

No

No

Yes (7 steps and mute)




No

Yes

Permanently stored on HDD

Yes

Yes

Fax, TEL, Ans/Fax

HDD Store, 500 jobs

No

Yes up to 505 locations

No


Item

Fax-to

HDD

USB

Specification

Yes

No

Fax

Email

Client

SMB

No

Yes

No

Yes

FTP

HTTP(S)

Yes

No

Multi-destination No



2-17


2.2.7. Paper Handling specification

Item

Standard Capacity

•

•

•

Specification

1,140 sheets @ 20 lb or 80g/m²

520-sheet cassette Tray (20 lb or 80g/m²) x 2

100-sheet MP tray (20 lb or 80g/m²)

2,180 sheets @ 20lb or 80g/m²

Max. Input

Capacity

Printing

MP Tray

Standard Cassette

Tray

MP + Tray x 4

Max. Size

Min. Size

297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17"), Banner

98 x 148 mm (3.85"x5.83")

Margin(T/B/L/R) 4.2+/-1.5mm

Capacity

•

•

•

•

Plain Paper: 100 sheets @ 80 g/m²

Envelopes: 10 sheets @ 75 g/m²

Labels: 20 sheets @ 120~150 g/m²

Thick Paper: 10 sheets @ 176 g/m²

Media sizes 98 x 148 mm ~ 297 x 432 mm (3.87 x 5.8" ~ 11.7 x 17")

Banner Size Printing : 297 mm x 1200 mm

Media type

Media weight

Sensing

Printer Default, Plain Paper, Thick Paper, Thin Paper, Bond Paper, Color Paper,

CardStock, Labels, Envelope, Preprinted, Letterhead, Recycled Paper, Cotton,

Archive, Glossy

•

16~47lb (60 ~ 176 g/m²) : Simplex, Duplex

Capacity

Media sizes

•

•

Paper Empty Detect: Yes

Paper Size Detect: No

520 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²) X 2

Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,

Statement, Custom

Media types

Media weight

Sensing

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Bond, Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled, CardStock,

Letterhead, Thick, Cotton, Colored, Archive, Glossy

Plain Paper: 71~90g/m² (19~24 lb), (Duplex : 19~24lb)

Thick Paper: 91~105g/m² (25~28 lb), (Duplex : 25~28lb)

Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 106~120g/m²


Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 176 ~ 216g/m²

Thin Paper: 60~70g/m² (16~18 lb)

Bond Paper: 105~120g/m² (28~32 lb)

Punched Paper: 71~90g/m² (19~24 lb)

Pre-Printed : 75~90g/m² (20~24 lb)

Recycled : 60~90g/m² (16~24 lb)

CardStock : 105~163g/m² (28~43lb)

Letterhead : 71~90g/m² (19~24lb)

Cotton paper : 75~90g/m² (20~24lb)

H/W Install Detect: Yes

Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes

Paper Type Detect: No

Paper Size Detect: Yes



Item

Optional Cassette

Tray

Capacity

Media sizes

Media types

Media weight

Sensing

Specification

520 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²) x 2

Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,

Statement, Custom



•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

N/A

Plain Paper: 71~90g/m²(19~24 lb), (Duplex : 19~24lb)

Thick Paper: 91~105g/m²(25~28 lb), (Duplex : 25~28lb)



Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 176 ~ 216g/m²

Thin Paper: 60~70g/m²(16~18 lb)

Bond Paper: 105~120g/m²(28~32 lb)

Punched Paper: 71~90g/m²(19~24 lb)

Pre-Printed : 75~90g/m²(20~24 lb)

Recycled : 60~90g/m²(16~24 lb)

CardStock : 105~163g/m² (28~43lb)

Letterhead : 71~90g/m² (19~24lb)

Cotton paper : 75~90g/m² (20~24lb)

H/W Install Detect: Yes

Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes

Paper Type Detect: No

Paper Size Detect: Yes

Optional High-Capacity Feeder(HCF)

Capacity

(FaceDown)

Output Stacking

Offset Stacking

Output Full sensing

Capacity

Staple Cartridge capacity

500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)

No

Yes

50 sheets stapling / 350 (in total) sheets stacking, internal

5000 staples / cartridge

Standard Finisher

Stacking

Stapling

Offline Stapling

Offset at Non

Staple job

•

•

Top Tray : 50 sheets with 80g/m² sheet

Finishing Tray : 300 sheets with 80g/m² sheet

1 Corner (Single)

No

No

Offset at Staple job Yes

Output Stacking Face Down

3250-sheet Booklet Finisher

Punch Kit

N/A

N/A


2-19


Item

Automatic Duplex

ADF

Supporting

Media sizes

Media types

Specification

Yes

Legder, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,

Statement, Custom



60~175g/m²(16~46 lb)

100 sheets ( 21lb, 80 g/m²)

Media weight

Capacity

2-sided Document

Scanning

Yes

Document Size

Document Weight

Sensing

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Width: 128 ~ 297 mm

Length : 128 ~ 432 mm

40~128 g/m² @simplex

50~128 g/m² @duplex

Paper empty detect : Yes

Paper width detect : Yes

Paper length detect : Yes

Auto Detected Size

Sensing

A3, A4, A4 SEF, A5, A5 SEF, B4, B5, B5 SEF



2.2.8. Supplies

Item

Toner Cartridge

Drum Unit

Waste Toner Container

Black

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Model Name

CLT-K809S

CLT-Y809S

CLT-M809S

CLT-C809S

CLT-R809

NOTE

Drum Units are exchangeable for all colors.

Average yield

20,000 pages

15,000 pages

15,000 pages

15,000 pages

Approx. 50,000 pages

CLT-W809

Approx 26,300 pages

@ Color : Mono Ratio (30% :

70%), 3 Pages/Job

NOTE

• Declared yield value in accordance with 5% coverage.

• Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the consumable’s lifespan may differ.

2.2.9. Maintenance Parts

Item

Developer Unit

ITB

ITB Cleaner

Transfer roller Assy

Fuser Unit

Part Code

JC96-06222A (K)

JC96-06219A (Y)

JC96-06220A (M)

•

•

JC96-06221A (C)

JC96-06200A

JC96-06246A

JC95-01514A

JC91-01063A (220V)

JC91-01064A (110V)

JC93-00540A

Pick-Up / Reverse / Forward roller (for Tray1,2,3,4,

MP Tray)

DADF Pick-Up roller Assy

DADF Friction Pad

JC97-04009A

JC97-03097A

Life

300,000 pages

300,000 pages

150,000 pages

150,000 pages

150,000 pages

200,000 pages

200,000 pages

100,000 pages

NOTE

Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan may differ.


2-21


2.2.10. Option

Image Item Model

CLX-9301 series

CLX-9251 series

CLX-9201 series

DCF

(Dual Cassette

Feeder)

CLX-PFP100/SEE Yes Yes Yes

Finisher CLX-FIN50S/SEE Yes Yes Yes

Job Separator CLX-JST100/SEE Yes Yes Yes

Fax

CLX-FAX160/XXX

NOTE

XXX : SEE, XEG,

XEU, XIL

Yes Yes Yes

Cabinet Stand CLX-DSK20T Yes Yes Yes

FDI Kit CLX-KIT10F Yes Yes Yes


Image Item

Working Table

Model

CLX-WKT000


CLX-9301 series

CLX-9251 series

CLX-9201 series

Yes Yes Yes

Card Reader Cover

Assy

CLX-CRH002 Yes Yes Yes

Cassette Heater CLX-DHK12C

SmarThru Workflow

V1.0

Yes

Yes

Wireless LAN CLX-NWA20L Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


2-23


2.3. Machine External View

1) Front View1

2-24

3

6

7

4

5

1

2

Duplex automatic document feeder cover

Duplex automatic document feeder width guides

Duplex automatic document feeder input tray

Duplex automatic document feeder output tray

Power-switch

Power receptacle

Optional dual cassette feeder right bottom door

10

11

8

9

12

13

Dual cassette feeder (tray 3, tray 4)

Standard tray (tray 1, tray 2)

Front door

Front door handle

Paper output tray

Control panel


2) Front View2


3

4

1

2

5

Scanner glass

White sheet

Multi-purpose tray

Multi-purpose tray paper width guide

USB port


2-25


3) Rear View

3

4

1

2

DADF Cable

Network Port

USB Port

USB Printer Port


4) Inner view


3

4

1

2

LSU window cleaning stick

Waste toner container

Toner Cartridges

Imaging units


2-27


2.4. Feeding System

2.4.1. Feeding System Overview

The feeding system picks up a paper from the cassette or MP tray and transports it to the machine inside. It mainly consists of the pick up unit, registration unit, transfer roller Assy, Exit unit.


2.4.2. Main Components and functions

a) Rollers


3

4

5

1

2

Tray 1 Paper tray

Tray 2 Paper tray

Tray 3 Paper tray(Option)

Tray 4 Paper tray(Option)

Tray 1 pick up / reverse / forward rollers


8

9

10

6

7

Tray 2 pick up / reverse / forward rollers

Tray 3 pick up / reverse / forward rollers (Option)

Tray 4 pick up / reverse / forward rollers (Option)

MP Tray pick up / reverse / forward rollers

Tray 1 feed roller

2-29


14

15

16

11

12

13

Tray 2 feed roller

Tray 3 feed roller (Option)

Tray 4 feed roller (Option)

Sensor registration

Roller registration

Roller transfer

17

18

19

20

21

Roller Exit 1st

Roller Exit 2nd (Option)

Roller Invert

Roller Duplex1

Roller Duplex2

•

Pick-Up roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)

-

This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

•

Forward roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)

-

This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transports the paper from the pick up roller to feed roller.

•

Reverse roller (Tray 1,2,3,4 and MP Tray)

-

This roller is placed against the forward roller and transports only one sheet to the feed roller. When two sheets of paper or more are transported from the pick up roller, the load of the torque limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets. As a result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower paper does not advance any further.

•

Feed roller

-

This roller transports the paper sent from the forward/reverse roller to the registration roller.

•

Registration roller

-

This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transports the paper to the transfer roller Assy.


b) Sensor, Motor, Solenoid



2-31


Name

Tray1 paper size detection sensor

Tray1 paper empty detection sensor

Function

Detects tray1 paper size

Detects tray1 paper empty

Tray1 upper limit detection sensor

Tray1 paper feed jam detection sensor

Tray2 paper size detection sensor

Tray2 paper empty detection sensor

Tray2 upper limit detection sensor

Tray2 paper feed jam detection sensor

Paper regi. jam detection sensor

Paper curl detection sensor

Detects tray1 upper limit

Detects Feed1 jam

Detects tray2 paper size

Detects tray2 paper empty

Detects tray2 upper limit

Detects Feed2 jam

Detects regi. jam

Detects paper curl between T2 Roller and fuser unit

Paper fuser-out jam detection sensor

Exit tray1 paper full detection sensor

Exit2 tray path &Return path solenoid

Duplex motor

Detects fuser unit jam

Detects paper full on Exit tray1

Change paper path

Controls duplex driving

Duplex jam detection sensor

Exit tray 2 paper full detection sensor

Detects duplex jam

Detects paper full on Exit tray2

Exit tray 2 paper return detection sensor Detects Duplex Return position

MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Paper empty detection sensor

Detects MP tray paper empty

NOTE

If paper is loaded in the MP tray, that tray takes priority over trays 1,2,3, or

4.

MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) solenoid

Tray1 Lift motor

Tray2 Lift motor

Controls MPF pick up roller

Lifting Knock up plate

Lifting Knock up plate

Connector & Pin information

CN4@ MAIN PBA, 19Pin









CN26@ MAIN PBA, 18Pin, 21Pin




CN26@ MAIN PBA, 6Pin~9Pin









2.4.3. Cassette (Tray 1,2,3,4)

The Cassette stores papers.

Paper size is set using the Size Guides in each tray.

Basic Cassette


•

Specification

1) Structure : Drawer Type

2) Capacity : 520 Sheets ( 80 g/m² paper standard)

3) Paper

-

Tray 1 : A5, A4, B5, B4, Letter, Statement, Legal

Tray 2,3,4 : A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11"×17"(Ledger), Statement, Legal

4) Weight : plain paper 60~216 g/m² (16~44 lb)

5) Plate knock up lift type : Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor


2-33


2.4.4. Pick-Up Unit

When pick-up takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface of the paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and pick up roller moves down. The forward roller and the reverse roller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the paper path, and the paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the feed roller.

NOTE

The Pick-Up Unit1 and Pick-Up Unit2 can’t be swapped over.

Pick–Up Unit1

Pick–Up Unit2



2.4.5. Registration Unit

The registration(Regi.) roller is driven by the Regi./MP motor. The Regi. clutch is located between the Regi. clutch and

Regi./MP motor, and it controls ON/OFF of the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the predetermined registration point.


2-35


2.4.6. MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit

The MPF Unit allows feeding of specialty media stock, envelopes, and custom size paper.

■ Specification

1) Capacity : 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)

2) Media Size : Max 11. 7” ×17” (297×432 ) / Min 3.87”×5.8” (98×148 )

3) Media Weight : Plain paper 60 ~ 176 g/m² (16~65lb)

4) Feeding Speed : 30 ppm (CLX-9301 series), 25ppm(CLX–9251 series), 20 ppm (CLX-9201 series) Letter/A4 LEF

(Long Edge Feeding)

■ Paper Separation

When the MP paper detection[A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a MP printing job, the MP solenoid[B] drops the pick-up roller[C] onto the top of the paper stack on the MP tray.

This machine uses an FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) system for feeding paper. The friction between the reverse roller[E] and forward roller[D] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.



2.5. Image Creation

2.5.1. Printing process overview

This machine uses four imaging units and four laser beams for color printing. Each Imaging unit consists of a Drum unit and Developer unit.

Each Drum unit has an OPC drum, Charge roller, Cleaning blade.

The OPC drum [A] is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the LSU (Laser Scanning unit) [B].

The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image) on each OPC drum is moved to the transfer belt[C] by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller[D].

1)

OPC drum charge

: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2)

Laser exposure

: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3)

Development

: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface. This machine uses four independent imaging units (one for each color).

4)

Transfer :

• Image transfer : The first transfer rollers opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the transfer belt. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.

• Paper transfer : The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the transfer belt to the media.

5)

Cleaning for OPC drum

: The cleaning blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after image transfer to the paper.

6)

Quenching for OPC drum

: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end of every job.

7)

Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt

: The cleaning blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.


2-37


2.5.2. Imaging Unit

2.5.2.1. Imaging Unit Overview

This machine uses the tandem type imaging unit. It makes 4 color developing during one paper path and increase the productivity for color printing.

Each Imaging Unit consists of the Drum unit and the Developer unit. The Developer units are not exchangeable but the

Drum units are exchangeable. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.2 mm).

The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The CRUM is the sub part of the Drum unit. It stores the count information and several data.



2.5.2.2. Drum drive

Each color OPC and Magnetic roller is driven by each color motor. The OPC Drum and Magnetic roller are supplied with power from the coupling.

The BLDC motor maintains the constant speed. So, the speed sync for each color depends on the BLDC motor without the additional device.

Phase sync for each OPC runout prints the pattern on the ITB and is adjusted by the data automatically.


2-39


2.5.2.3. Developer Unit

This machine uses a dual-component development system and has four Developer units. Each new unit contains 185g of magnetic toner carrier. The developer in each unit is supplied to the magnetic(development) roller[A] by the two mixing augers[B]. The diameter of the magnetic roller is 16 mm.

Each Developer unit has a TC(Toner Concetration) sensor[C]. They are used for controlling the operating range of toner density.


■ Developer Circulation


Two mixing augers[A] circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to mix the developer and toner well.

This occurs at the following times :

•

During the process control self-checking

•

During toner supply job

•

During development job

If the developer unit is stored at temperature above 50°C (122°F), it does not works normally. The toner in developer unit is easy to harden at temperature above 50°C (122°F).


2-41


2.5.3. ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit

2.5.3.1. ITB Unit overview

The toner on the four drums is moved to the ITB by the first transfer roller (T1 roller).

The image overlapped by four colors is moved to the paper by the second transfer roller (T2 roller). The remaining toners are removed by the cleaning blade and moved to the waste toner container.

This process is done with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow on the diagram shows the direction of ITB rotation. The rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller and transfer belt. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slip.

There are three ACR(Auto Color Registration) sensor and one photo sensor. Two of them are for the line position adjustment and the other is for process control. One photo sensor controls the position of the first transfer roller.

2-42

3

4

1

2

5

6

9

10

7

8

ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)

1st Transfer Roller

ITB Drive Roller

Tension Roller

Photo sensor

Cleaning Blade

ACR sensor

2nd Transfer Roller

Toner Collection Auger

Drum Unit



2.5.3.2. Transfer belt drive

■ Drive motor

The ITB drive motor[A] drives the transfer belt[B] by using gears and the ITB drive roller[C].

■ ITB speed control

This printer uses the encoder disc to control the transfer belt speed. The encoder[A] is on one of the guide rollers[B]. This encoder checks the rotation speed of the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then it adjusts the rotation speed of the transfer belt.

The encoder contains a disk that has 550 notches on its surface. These notches are read by the sensor [C]. The controller counts the number of notches that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller ignores such unusual signals. Therefore, an incorrect reading does not affect the rotation speed.


2-43


2.5.3.3. Transfer belt cleaning

The ITB-cleaner removes toner (during printing) and the ACR sensor patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) from the belt. Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB-cleaning motor.

The cleaning blade[A] in the ITB cleaner always contacts the transfer belt[B], and removes the used toner from the belt.

Then the toner collection auger[C] transports the waste toner to the waste toner container.

The film[D] on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by driver roller is transferred to the tension roller[E] and the toner collection auger gear[F] drives the gear[G], and collects the toner.



2.6. Fuser unit

This section describes the image fusing process used by the machine.

2.6.1. Fuser unit overview

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This machine uses an instant fusing system. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional fusing and pressure roller system.

1)

Halogen Lamp

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of axial direction.

These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, those of the side heater lamp are on both sides. The lamp s are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When rotating the fusing belt, these lamps does not rotate.

2)

Fusing Belt

The fusing belt gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfer it to toner and paper. The fusing belt consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warming up time and mode changing time. To prevent the fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a Nip inside the fusing belt. To maintain the proper Nip between the fusing belt and pressure roller, the spring is used.

3)

Pressure Roller

The pressure roller is a rubber roller which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is driven by the driving system and drives the fusing belt.

4)

Non-Contact(NC) Sensor

NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors), located near the center and the end of the fusing belt, control the temperature of the fusing belt.


2-45


5)

Thermostat

Thermostats cut off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt becomes abnormally hot as a result of problems such as NC sensor malfunction. These thermostats are used to prevent abnormal operation. When the thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced (as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit).

2.6.2. Fuser Unit drive

The fuser motor[A] drives the pressure roller[B] through the gear train. The fusing belt[C] pressurized by the pressure roller[B] is rotated by driving it.



2.6.3. Fuser unit temperature control

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors detect the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.

■ Overheat Protection

The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :

•

The temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 240°C for 20 sec.

The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails :

•

Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

•

If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp.


2-47


2.7. Laser scanning unit (LSU)

2.7.1. LSU overview

LSU consists of 1 polygon motor and 4 laser diodes(LD) units and forms a latent image on the surface of 4 OPC drums. For this process, LSU has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, 2 F-Theta Lens, 2 reflective mirrors on optical path for each color.

This LSU adopted the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser beam from the rear to the front, M Color and Y Color scan the laser beam from the front to the rear.

Also, the LSU has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line and the shutter device to protect the glass on the LSU optical path from the contamination.

2-48

3

4

5

1

2

LD PBA

P/Mirror Motor

F1 Lens

F2 Lens

Skew Adjust Assy

6

7

Shutter

PD PBA



2.7.2. Laser Scanning Optical path

The laser beam from the LSU is placed at intervals of 78mm for each color. All colors uses the same polygon motor for oblique incidence.

F2 Lens [A] determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the secondary scanning direction. This is adjusted at the factory. The primary scanning line slope by the machine difference is adjusted by skew adjustment in the LSU

Reflecting mirrors [C], [D] on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This is adjusted at the factory.

The LSU has 2 types depending on printing speed. The difference between 2 types is shown in the table below.

Mode

LD Unit

P/Motor speed

Process speed

H/W interface

20ppm

Laser Diode : Single Beam driving IC : for Single LD

27,874 rpm

118 mm/sec

Interface with machine : 50

Pin

30ppm

Laser Diode : Single Beam driving IC : for Single LD

34016 rpm

144 mm/sec

Interface with machine : 50

Pin

Remark

FFC cable


2-49


2.7.3. Laser synchronizing detectors

The machine has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA). They are located at each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.

The two PD PBA detect the following :

•

[A]: Scanning start position for black

•

[B]: Scanning start position for yellow

This machine recognizes each color from the time that they are detected.

■ Main Scan Start Detection

4 beams are detected by the PD PBA at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal. Data is scanned by Hsync.

The arrow in the above diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black (& Cyan) and Yellow (& Magenta) use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.



2.7.4. Automatic line position adjustment

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes the average of the spaces, then adjusts the following positions and magnification :

•

Sub scan line position for CMY

•

Main scan line position for CMY

•

Magnification ratio for CMY

•

Skew for CMY

The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured.

•

KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.

•

KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.


2-51


■ Adjustment

•

Sub Scan Line Position for CMY

The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K. The machine measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. When the gaps for a color are not correct, the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.

•

Main Scan Line Position for CMY

When the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser write start timing for each scan line.

•

Magnification Adjustment for CMY

When the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for the required color.

•

Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K.

■ Adjustment Conditions

Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this function.

Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following :

•

ΔT = Temperature change of LSU (Laser Scanning Unit) between the temperature of the previous line position adjustment and the current temperature.

•

Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval During Print Job :

Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions occurs when the machine checks at the sheet interval.

1) ΔT > Temperature threshold (LSU temperature: [default: 3°C])

2) Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)

Waste Toner Container Not-Installed / Installed :

1) Line position adjustment starts automatically when waste toner container is removed and reinstalled.

Drum Unit or Developer Unit replaced :

1) When the machine detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically performed.

ITB replaced :

1) When the machine detects a new ITB or other ITB, SVC engineer have to execute the adjustment manually.


■ Main Scan Skew Adjustment


Skew adjustment assembly[A] consists of the worm gear[1] for adjustment and worm gear[2]. When ACR executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.

Skew adjustment assembly[A] for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens[B]. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.


2-53


2.7.5. Shutter Mechanism

Laser scanning unit has the shutter[A]. As a result, toner and dust do not fall on the glass[B]of the laser optics housing.

When the waste toner container is installed, it push the side of the shutter and shutter door is opened. On the contrary to this, when the waste toner is not installed, shutter door is closed.

•

Shutter off

: Printing is impossible. Shutter door is closed. Waste toner container is not installed.

•

Shutter on

: Printing is possible. Shutter door is opened. Waste toner container is installed.

When the shutter is not on at printing, the LSU Unit Failure error will occur.


2.8. Drive System

2.8.1. Drive Motors

The following diagram displays the locations of the printer drive motors.


2

3

No.

1

6

7

4

5

Motor

Exit

Fuser

Regi / MP

Feed

Pick-Up

Toner supply

OPC / DEVE

Motor type

PM-STEP

BLDC

BLDC

E-CLT

HB-STEP

PM-STEP

DC

BLDC


1

1

2

1

2

4

4

Qty

1

Function

Exit driving

(Reverse driving at Duplex job)

Fuser driving/Fuser pressure mode

(Reverse driving at pressure mode)

Regi / MP driving

Regi / MP driving control

Feed 1 / 2 Roll driving

Pick-Up Roll / CST Lift driving

(Reverse driving at CST Lift driving)

Toner transfer in toner cartridge driving Duct

OPC/DEVE driving

2-55


No.

8

9

10

Motor

ITB

T1 Dis/En

Motor type

BLDC

PM-STEP

Waste toner container PM-STEP

Qty

1

1

1

Function

ITB driving

T1 Dis/Engage

Waste toner container leveling


2.8.2. Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS/ENG)


Front View

Rear View


2-57


2.8.3. Pick Up Drive

The following is a diagram of the Pick-up drive:

•

•

Power Train Pick-up : rotating (Pick-up input) / counter rotating (Cst LIFT input)

1 Step → rotating → 2 Gear (Pick-up driving)

1 Step → counter rotating → 3 Gear → 4 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear (CST Lift driving)


2.8.4. Regi/ MP Drive

The following is a diagram of the drives that power the MP, Regi systems:


•

•

Power Train Regi/MP : BLDC driving, Clutch driving control

1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Clutch / Gear (Regi. driving)

1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear → 7 Clutch / Gear (MP driving)


2-59


2.8.5. Feed Drive

Power Train

•

•

Feed : HB-STEP driving

1 HB-STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Feed1 driving)

1 HB-STEP → 2 Gear → 4 Gear (Feed2 driving)


2.8.6. Fuser/Exit Drive

The following diagram displays the locations of the Fuser and Exit drives:


•

•

•

Power Train •

•

•

Fuser / Fuser pressure mode : BLDC Motor driving, Reverse driving at fuser pressure mode

Exit : Step Motor driving, Reverse driving at duplex mode

Fuser and Fuser relase One way gear is adopted.

1 BLDC → Rotation→ 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Fuser driving)

1 BLDC → Counter rotation → 4 Gear → 5 Gear → 6 Gear (Fuser pressure mode driving)

7 PM STEP → 8 Gear (Exit driving)


2-61


2.8.7. Waste Toner Container Drive

Power Train

•

Step motor & Gear-RDCN WTB : Waste toner container driving

1 PM STEP → 2 Gear-RDCN WTB (Waste toner container driving)

2.8.8. Toner Supply Drive

Power Train

•

•

DUCT & Bottle driving

1 DC Motor → 2 Gear RDCN SUPPLY → 5 Gear DUCT (DUCT driving)

1 DC Motor → 2 Gear RDCN SUPPLY → 3 Gear SUPPLY IDLE → 4 Gear SUPPLY (Bottle driving)



2.9. Scanner System

This section describes the printer scanner system parts and functions.

2.9.1. Scanner System Overview

During the scanning process, the surface of a document is exposed to Full Rate(FR) module light.

The light reflected from the paper is led through mirrors, a lens, and a slit to a CCD where optical-to-electrical conversion is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal.

This analog signal is changed to a digital signal, which then undergoes various corrective processes necessary for image formation. After that, arithmetic operations are performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to the data writing processor.

In this machine, a reduction-type CCD for color processing is used. CCD is arranged in 3 lines and covered with color filters (Red, Green, and Blue).

2.9.2. Scanning System Components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system :

1)

DADF glass

The DADF glass is used when a document is read by the Automatic Document Feeder. The light from the White-LED is illuminated on the Document through this glass.

The document is transported on the DADF glass by the DADF operation.

Do not use such solvents, as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the DADF glass, as it is coated so as not to be scratched by Document.


2-63


2)

FR(Full Rate)-Module

FR-Module is consists of the White-LED , Light-Guide, mirror-1 etc.

It is driven by the scan motor (HB Step Motor) and scans the document on the glass.

•

White-LED

This is a light source for scanning the document on the glass. ( There are 4 White-LEDs. (Front 2 EA, Rear 2 EA)

•

Light-Guide

This is to efficiently transfer the light creating WLED to the surface of the document . made of the transparent

Plastic Regin.

•

Mirror-1

This mirror directs the light reflected from the Document to the mirror-2

3)

HR(Half Rate)-Module

HR-Module mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. The reflected light on document is passed from the mirror-1 through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. HR module is driven by the same scan motor as that of the FR module.

The speed and distance are half that of the FR module.



4)

Lens

The light reflected from the mirror-3 is concentrated to the CCD. The distance between the Lens and CCD is aligned accurately.

5)

CCD board

Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration, and A/D conversion are applied on the electrical signal which was converted by the CCD.

6)

Auto Paper Sensor

The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the Auto Paper Sensor fixed on the Align-frame.

7)

Pulley-Driving

The Steel Wire is coiled to this part and rotated by the scan motor. This also transfers the power to move the FR/HR module.


2-65


2.10. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)

2.10.1. DADF overview

Symbol

R1

R6

R7

R8

R9

R2

R3

R4

R5

Part

Simplex and Duplex Regi.

roller

DADF forward roller

DADF friction pad

DADF pick up roller

Original document tray

Exit tray

Exit roller

Feed in roller

Feed out roller

Function

Aligns the leading edge of the paper for registration.

Separates an original from the tray and transfers it to the paper path.

Prevent the multi-feeding.

Picks up an original from the tray.

Paper input tray

Paper output tray

Sends an original to the exit tray and forms the duplex reverse path.

Feeds an original before scanning.

Transfers a scanned original to the exit roller.


2.10.2. Electrical parts location


S3

S4

S5

Symbol

S1

S2

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10

Description

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Cover)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Regi)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Detect)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Exit Idle)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Paper Length)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Paper Width)

PHOTO-INTERRUPTER

(Exit)

BLCD MOTOR

CLUTCH-ELECTRIC

(Pick Up)

CLUTCH-ELECTRIC

(Regi)


Part code

0604-001415

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001393

Controller board

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

PBA-ADF

2-67


2.10.3. DADF Drive System

DADF consists of one motor and two clutch to transfer the paper.

•

A BLDC motor drives the system for simplex and duplex job.

•

The Pick up and Regi clutch controls the driving on/off.

•

The Cam type gear and solenoid is used for duplex reverse.


2.10.3.1. DADF Original Drive Assembly


After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system totally.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH can’t rotate inversely. The Spring that is included in DADF-GUIDE PICK UP ASS’Y is connected to

COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, it makes Stand-by status and fix the stopper operation.

The ADF roller and Pick up Roller is connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with the power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the Registration roller. When the pick up drive is stopped and Registration roller is driven, the ADF roller become idle.

The normal process is :

•

When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated, and printing job starts, the motor and pick up clutch work.

Then, the pick-up roller moves down and contacts an original in the tray.

•

When the Registration sensor detects the paper, the pick up clutch stops.

•

When the Detect-Sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the machine enters stand-by status.


2-69


2.10.3.2. DADF Registration (Regi) Drive Assembly

The Regi drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the Registration Roller and transfer the paper to ROLLER FEED.

The Registration Roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When original is placed in the Nip, the roller is rotated for alignment.

The CLUTHC-ELETRIC repeats on/off to align each paper.

The GEAR-KNOB and GEAR-REDUCTION uses the BELT to provide the PULLEY connecting ROLLER-EXIT with the power. This structure makes the user remove the jammed paper easily.

2.10.3.3. DADF Feed Drive Assembly

The ROLLER FEED is driven by the BELT-TIMMING that is connected to Motor.

The ROLLER-FEED and ROLLER-M IDLE SCF make the feeding force by using a spring pressure method.

The Motor transfers the paper through interlocking the Roller-Feed in and the Roller-Feed out. At scan, the Motor is driven continually to maintain stable paper transfer.


2.10.3.4. DADF Exit Drive Assembly


The power from the Motor is transferred to GEAR-EXIT and ROLER-EXIT. The paper is transferred to the exit. At duplex mode, counter rotation occurs.

To keep the pressure of the Exit Roller, the ROLLER-EXIT_IDLE is pressurized by spring. At duplex mode, when it is rotated inversely, it make the space between rollers to protect the jam.

The space between rollers is adjusted by LINK-EXIT_IDLE and SENSOR-EXIT_IDLE.

2.10.3.5. Original Return Drive

The solenoid works at only duplex mode.

At Duplex Mode, when the motor rotates inversely, the solenoid is on and the GEAR-CAM OUTER and GEAR-EXIT are driven.

When the GEAR-EXIT rotates, the solenoid drives the GEAR-CAM and it makes the space between the Roller-Exit and

Idle Roller.


2-71


2.11. Hardware Configuration

The CLX-9201/9251/9301 Electrical Circuit System consists of the following :

•

Main Controller (Main board)

•

OPE Controller

•

DADF Controller

•

HVPS board

•

SMPS board

•

FDB board

Diagram of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 Series Electrical Circuit

De bug1

De bug2

M ODEM

(S iLa b )

F INIS HER

D CF

M ICOM

D ADF

M ICOM

U ART

OP E

S CANNER

C CD/AF

E

A M3715

U S B

P HY

7” TFT m DDR

512MB

N AND

256MB

U S B

HUB

US B HO S T

P ORT2

M S OK

E

2

P ROM

32KB

I

2

C

T o n e r

D e ve

S P I

I

2

C

G P I O

P WM

G

S

I

P I

2C

P IO

U ART

C P U

(C4N)

L CD

CON

I P

Re CP

4

U S B

HOS T

U S B HO S T

U S B

DEV

U S B DEVICE

U S B

HUB

GL850

P WM

L S U

HP VC

S ATA N AND

D DR

E THE

R

R GM II

P HY

U S B HO S T

P ORT1

U S B DEVICE

C LUTCH

S OLENOID

S ENS ORS

F AN

S TEP MOT

BLDC MOT

DC MOT

D DR3

1GB

N AND

128MB

A VR

1 Gb p s N/W

H VP S

L S U

3 20GB

2.5”

F DB

S MP S

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller and scan controller.

The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port, and it receives copy data from the

Scan Controller. It takes this information and generates printable video bitmap data. It controls all modules required to print, that is, LSU, HVPS, FAN, Fuser, etc.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through UART(Universal Asynchronous

Receiver Transmitter). It communicates with the toner cartridge and drum/developer unit through I2C to check their life.

The main controller adopted Dure Core CPU 1GHZ, DDR3 1GB memory, Flash NAND 128MB, 320GB SATA HDD to control the engine driving, video signal processing, interface, etc. successfully.



A MICOM at the main controller controls the fuser lamp on/off and system power according to an optimized energy-saving algorithm for optimal efficiency. It also communicates with the OPE Controller through the USB 2.0 protocol to display the system information on LCD.

The OPE Controller displays the status of the system by using the WSVGA TFT LCD in response to user actions or the main controller.

The soft power switch in the KEY SUB BOARD is used to safely shut down the system power.

The DADF Controller controls some mechanisms required to scan by feeder continuously and communicates with the main controller to synchronize the scanning timing.

The HVPS board generates high-voltage channels and controls it. The FDB board controls the fuser lamp On/Off. The

SMPS board generates the 5V, 24V for system power.


2-73


Circuit Board Locations

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:



2.11.1. Main Controller

The main controller consists of the main processor(Chorus4N), memory(DDR3 1GB), flash(128MB), 1G Ethernet PHY,

USB2.0 HUB, Micom(Power/Fuser control), Scan/Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection, motor driving IC, Engine signal interface connection, power interface.

The main processor (Dual Core 1GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display and communicates the various devices. The

HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to the other device (DADF, DCF, Finisher, Modem) by UART.

1) Main Controller Diagram

De bg1

De bg2

A VR

M ODEM

(S iLa b )

F INIS HER

D CF

M ic o m

D ADF

M ic o m

S CANNER

C CD/AFE

OP E

U ART

A M3715

M S OK

E

2

P ROM 32KB

S P I

I

2

C

D e ve

Y M C K

S TEP MOT

BLDC MOT

DC MOT

C LUTCH

S OLENOID

T o n e r

Y M C K

S ENS ORS

P WM

I 2C G P IO

C HORUS 4-N

C ORTEX-A9

1GHz

C ORTEX-A9

1GHz

3 2/32KB 3 2/32KB

A RM946

250MHz

8 /8KB

L 2 1MB

S P I U ART

L CD

CONT

I P

Re CP

4

S RAM 256KB

U S B

HOS T

U S B

DEV

P WM

MTR

L S U

HP VC

D DR3

BUS

N AND

BUS

S ATA

E THE

R

F AN

H VP S

L S U

D DR3

1GB

N AND

128MB

320GB

2.5”

U S B

P HY

U S B HOS T

U S B DEVICE

R GMII

7” TFT m DDR

512MB

N AND

256MB

U S B

HUB

U S B

HUB

GL850

P HY

U S B HOS T

P ORT2

U S B HOS T

P ORT1

U S B DEVICE

1 Gb p s N/W

ü Real Time Co n tro l

. S can /En g in e/Fax

ü X OA L in u x


2-75


2) Main Controller Connection Information

•

Connection

1 EXIT

2 SATA POWER

3 SATA SIGNAL

4 CCD

5 USB HOST(OPE)

6 OPE

7 FDI

8 GIGA RJ45

9 USH HOST JACK

10 USB DEVICE JACK

11 LSU

12 HVPS Power

2-76

13 FDI I/F

14 OPC BLDC

15 DEVE CRUM/ERASER

16 SMPS

17 OPC PHASE

18 DCF I/F

19 FINISHER I/F

20 LSU JOINT

21 HVPS I/F

22 TC SENSOR

23 SIDE

24 CASSETTE

25

26

27

33

MAIN BLDC

ID SENSOR

T1/EXIT/ITB/FUSER

MOTOR

28 TONER DC

29 FUSER DRAWER

30 ITB ENCODER

31 SCAN

32 MSOK I/F

FAX JOINT



•

Information

-

Part Code : JC92-02429A

NOTE

This main board is for all models of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 series

-

Part Name : PBA-MAIN

3) Master System Operation Key (MSOK)

MSOK PBA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, a EEPROM and a X-CRUM.The

flash memory(4MByte), EEPROM(256Kbit) and X-CRUM are used for all system operation(system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).

NOTE

When a main board needs to be exchanged, the MSOK PBA should be re-installed to the new main board to retain the system information.

4) FAX JOINT PBA

The FAX JOINT PBA is used for interfacing between the main board and modem PBA. It uses UART for interface.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : PBA-FAX JOINT

•

Connection

1

2

Main PBA I/F connector

Modem Card I/F connector


2-77


5) Modem Card (Optional)

The modem card is used to transfer and receive the fax data through a telephone line. This PBA is controlled by the main board and has two connectors, connectors, one for the telephone line connection and the other for an external phone connection.

•

Information

-

Fax Kit model name : CLX-FAX160

-

Part Code :JC92-02558A

-

PBA name : PBA-FAX JOINT

•

Connection

1

2

Fax JOINT I/F connector

TEL Line I/F connector

3 External Phone I/F connector

6) Foreign Device Interface (FDI)

The FDI Module as a option is used to track machine usage such as the number of print or copy pages for some special users. This module interfaces to the main board.

•

Information

-


-

PBA name : PBA-SUB FDI

•

Connection

1 Connector to Main controller



2.11.2. Operation Panel (OPE) controller

The OPE controller consists of an SOC ( TI AM3715-800MHz ), 256MB mobile DDR1 memory, 256MB NAND flash memory, 7 inch touch LCD(800x480). The AM3715 is used to interface with users through the touch screen and some buttons. The AM3715 supports the Graphic Accelation for better UI.

1) OPE controller diagram


2-79


2) OPE MAIN PBA

•

Information

-

Part Code : JC92–02436A

NOTE

This board is for all models of the CLX-9201/9251/9301 series

-

Part Name : OPE MAIN

•

Connection

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

KEY PBA Interface connector

MAIN PBA POWER Interface connector

LCD DATA Interface connector

MAIN PBA USB Interface connector

LCD TSP Interface

LCD BACK LIGHT Interface

USB Host Port for Memory Stick


3) 7” TFT LCD, TOUCH SCREEN


•

Information

-


-

Part Name : LCD/TSP

4) OPE KEY PBA

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : OPE KEY

•

Connection

1 Interface Connector to OPE Main


2-81


2.11.3. ADF PBA

ADF PBA controls the DADF driving. It uses RENESAS’s uPD70F3824(48MHz Main Clock, 256KB Flash memory, 24KB

RAM) and interfaces with MAIN PBA through UART communication. It has one Motor Driver IC for motor driving and controls one BLDC motor, one solenoid, two clutch, ten sensors.

•

Information

-


-

PBA Name : PBA-ADF

•

Connection

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

Scan Joint PBA

Exit Solenoid

Length Sensor 1,2,3 / Width Sensor 1,2

Exit Sensor

Exit Idle Sensor

BLDC Motor

Cover Open Sensor / Regi. Sensor / Detect Sensor

Pick up Clutch / Regi. Clutch / Scan Read Sensor


2.11.4. SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) board


SMPS board supplies electric power to the Main Board and other boards. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection modes for over current and overload.

•

Specification

General Input/ Output Voltage

1) AC 110V (90V ~ 135V)

2) AC 220V (180V ~ 270V)

3) Input Current: 13.7A (110V) / 6.8A (220V)

4) Output Power: 1500W

DC 5V : 55W / DC 5VS : 30W / DC 24V : 432W

•

Information

Part Code

110V

JC44-00093A

Part Name SMPS Type 5 V1

•

Connection

3

4

1

2

INPUT_AC

OUTPUT_24V1/2/3/4/5/6 (to DC POWER PBA)

SMPS Enable

OUTPUT_5V1/2/3/4/S1/S2 (to DC POWER PBA)

220V

JC44-00100C

SMPS Type 5 V2


2-83


•

Input / Output connector

-

AC Input Connector (CN1)

PIN Assign

1

2

-

AC Input Connector (CN2)

PIN Assign

1

2

3

-

DC Output Connector (CN3)

PIN Assign

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

-

DC Output Connector (CN4)

PIN Assign

1

2

3

4

PIN NO

AC_L

AC_N

PIN Name

GND

24VOn_Off

GND

PIN Name

+24V1

GND

+24V2

+GND

+24V3

GND

+24V4

GND

PIN Name

+5V1

GND

+5V2

GND

Description

AC Input

Description

AC Input

Description

Power

24V Ground

Power

24V Ground

Power

24V Ground

Power

24V Ground

Description

Power

5V Ground

Power

5V Ground


2.11.5. Fuser Drive Board (FDB)

This board supplies the voltage to Fuser AC, Heater, Main board.


•

Information

SEC CODE

PBA NAME

•

Connection

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

Heater I/F

Fuser AC

FDB I/F

Type 5

Main S/W

Inlet

Heater S/W

110V

JC44-00210A

FDB V1

220V

JC44-00211A

FDB V2


2-85


2.11.6. HVPS board

HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, which include ITHV(4), MHV(4), DEV(4), FUSER, SAW, THV.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : HVPS

•

Connection

10

11

8

9

12

6

7

4

5

13

14

1

2

3

Ithv Y/M/C/K

FUSER

SAW

THV

HVPS I/F

HVPS VOLTAGE

DEV Y

MHV Y

DEV M

MHV M

DEV C

MHV C

DEV K

MHV K



2.11.7. Eraser PBA

Eraser PBA has one LED. This LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after printing.

•

Information

•


• Part Name : PBA-ERASER

2.11.8. Fuser PBA

The Fuser PBA includes CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. It also provides a connection interface for the pressure sensor.

•

Connection

1

2

Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F

Pressure Sensor

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : FUSER PBA


2-87


2.11.9. Waste Sensor PBA

The Waste Sensor PBA detects the waste toner level inside the waste toner container.

•

Information

•


• Part Name : WASTE SENSOR RX

2.11.10. CRUM PBA

The CRUM PBA includes CRU memory for developer unit, drum unit, toner cartridge life cycle counting.

•

Information

• Part Code : JC92-02456A

•

Part Name : TONER CRUM

2.11.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA

The Deve Crum Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the imaging unit(drum unit and developer unit) and the machine.

•

Information

•


• Part Name : DEVE CRUM JOINT



2.11.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA

The Toner CRUM Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the toner cartridge and the machine.

•

Information

•


• Part Name : TONER CRUM I/F

2.11.13. ITB Encoder PBA

The ITB Encoder PBA provides ITB belt rotation speed information by using a specific photo interrupt sensor (Encoder

Sensor).

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : ITB ENCODER

•

Connection

1 ITB Encoder Interface


2-89


2.11.14. Scan Joint PBA

The Scan Joint PBA has one bipolar step motor drive IC for driving the scanner motor. It functions as connection between

WLED, APS Sensor1, APS Sensor2, Cover Open Sensor1, Cover Open Sensor2, Home Position Sensor and Main PBA.

And it functions as the joint PBA for ADF I/F and 24V, 5V power connectors.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : PBA-SCAN JOINT

•

Connection

3

4

1

2

5

6

MAIN PBA

ADF PBA

WLED CTL PBA

Scan Motor

APS Sensor1,2

Home Position Sensor, Cover Open Sensor

1,2


2.11.15. Charge Coupled Device Module(CCDM) PBA


The function of this board is to convert the reflected light from an original document to electrical signals. It includes the

CCD, ADC, Logic IC, etc. The CCD converts the reflected light from an original document to three-color analog signals; red, green, blue. ADC converts each analog signal to digital. And for high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is converted to LVDS format with serialization.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : PBA-CCDM

•

Connection

1 MAIN PBA


2-91


2.11.16. White-LED(WLED) CTL PBA

The WLED CTL PBA has the LED DRIVER IC for WLED light drive.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : PBA-WLED CTL

•

Connection

1

2

3

Scan Joint PBA

WLED AL Front

WLED AL Front

2.11.17. White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA

The WLED AL FRONT consists of two WLED used as scanner light. The scanner unit has two WLED AL FRONT PBAs.

•

Information

-


-

Part Name : PBA-WLED AL Front

•

Connection

1 WLED CTL PBA


2.12. DCF Unit

DCF (Double Cassette Feeder) is an optional device to store more papers.

1) Front sectional view


5

6

7

3

4

1

2

2) Paper path

Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly

Feed Roller (Cassette 3)

Idle Roller (Cassette 3)

Forward Roller (Cassette 3)

Retard Roller (Cassette 3)

Pickup Roller (Cassette 3)

Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly

10

11

8

9

12






1

2

Tray3 paper path

Tray4 paper path


2-93


3) Layout of electrical parts

S5

S6

S7

S1

S2

S3

S4

Ref.

M1

M2

M3

SW1

SW2

Description

Feed motor

Tray3 Pick up motor

Tray4 Pick up motor

Tray3 auto size switch

Tray4 auto size switch

Tray3 feed sensor

Tray3 limit sensor

Tray3 paper empty sensor

Tray4 feed sensor

Tray4 limit sensor

Tray4 paper empty sensor

Door open sensor

Parts number

JC31-00033B

JC31-00149A

JC31-00149A

JC32-00013A

JC32-00013A

0604-001381

0604-001393

0604-001393

0604-001381

0604-001393

0604-001393

JC39-01696A

DC controller PCB

CN5 3 to 6

CN5 9 to 12

CN5 13 to 16

CN9 1 to 4

CN9 5 to 8

CN6 7 to 9

CN6 4 to 6

CN6 1 to 3

CN6 16 to 18

CN6 13 to 15

CN6 10 to 12

CN3 1 to 2



4) Sensor and signal

9

10

11

6

8

4

5

No.

1

3

Sensor

P_Size_DCF1 nP_Empty_DCF1_IHCF

Limit_DCF1_IHCF

Feed_DCF1_IHCF

P_Size_DCF2 nP_Empty_DCF2

Limit_DCF2

Feed_DCF2 nDoor_open

Signal

Tray3 Paper Size analog signal

Tray3 Paper Empty signal

Tray3 Paper Limit signal

Tray3 Feed signal

Tray4 Paper Size analog signal

Tray4 Paper Empty signal

Tray4 Paper Limit signal

Tray4 Feed signal

Door open signal


2-95


5) Paper feeding system

3

8

No.

Name

1

6

2

7







4

9

12

15

13

16

5

10

11

14




Idle Roller (Cassette 4) nP_Empty_DCF1 nP_Empty_DCF2

Limit_DCF1_IDCF

Limit_DCF2_DCF

Feed_DCF1_IDCF

Feed_DCF2_DCF

Description

This roller transports the paper from the cassette3 or 4.

This roller transports the paper from the pickup roller to the feed roller.

When two sheets of paper or more are transported from the pickup roller, the torque limit load is bigger than the resistance between the sheets. As the result, retard roller is stopped and the lower paper is not advanced any further. When the last sheet is transported from the pick up roller, the retard roller rotates following the feed roller.

This roller transports the paper from the forward roller to the basic machine.

When the paper is passed at the feed roller, this roller makes paper transporting be smooth.

This sensor detects the paper in the cassette3 or 4.

This sensor detects whether the paper is at pickup position or not.

This sensor detects the leading edge of the paper that is passing on the feed roller.


6) Block Diagram


The DCF board controls all functions for DCF Assy. It consists of CPU, Motor drive IC.

The Micom in the board receives the information from the paper size sensor, empty sensor, feed sensor etc. and communicates with the copier main board through the UART.

When being received the print job command from the interface connector (CN7) through UART, DCF board drives the feed motor and pick up motor to pick up a paper.

This board has 2 LEDs. The left LED is for checking 5V power supply and the right LED is checking the micom operation.


2-97


7) Plug and jack location list

2-98

Connector

Number

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6

CN7

CN9

Connection

Download tool I/F(Minicube)

Debug I/F

Cover open Switch (24V interlock Switch)

USB I/F

EMPTY/LIFT/FEED(Tray3,4) Sensor

FEED / PICKUP3,4 Motor

Interface with Main

Papersize sensor(Tray3,4)


2.13. Finisher

1) Front Section View


7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

2) Paper Path

Entrance Sensor

Passthru Sensor

Paddle Home Sensor

Media Height Sensor

Tamper Home_R Sensor

Tamper Home_F Sensor

Eject Home Sensor

Jam Door Open Sensor

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

Front Door Open Sensor

Stacker Tray STB Sensor

Stacker Tray Home Sensor

Paper Feed roller

Paper Exit roller

Jam door

Turning Knob

1

2

Finisher Main Tray - Staple / Offset

Finisher Top Tray – None Staple


2-99


3) Layout of electrical parts

S9

S10

S11

S12

M1

S5

S6

S7

S8

Ref.

S1

S2

S3

S4

M6

M7

M8

M9

M2

M3

M4

M5

Part Name

SENSOR_TOSHIBA TLP1243(C8)



AS Sensor_KIA0005C

AS Sensor_KIA0005C


SM5-108N2-80S-C5

SM5-108N2-80S-C5




AS Sensor_KIA0005C

ASSY:HB MOTOR:S2M19T

ASSY:HB MOTOR:S2M19T

ASSY:PM MOTOR:S2M12T



AS-MOTOR DC EJECTOR

AS-MOTOR PM:Z18:HELICAL

AS-MOTOR PM:STAPLER

AS-MOTOR PM:STAPLER

2-100

Function

Paddle Home Sensor

Rear Tamper Home Sensor

Rear Tamper Home Sensor-LET

Pass- thru Sensor

Ejector Home Sensor

Tray STB Sensor

Jam Door Open Sensor

Front Cover Open Sensor

Tray Home Sensor

Front Tamper Home Sensor

Media Height Sensor

Entrance Sensor

Paddle Motor

Feed Motor

Stacker Moving Motor

Rear Tamper Motor

SCU Solenoid

Ejector Motor

Front Tamper Motor

Stapler Cover Solenoid

Push Holder Solenoid


4) Block Diagram

5) Plug and jack location list


Connector Connection

CN25 ENGINE Interface

CN18

CN6

Door and Cover Switch

Stapler unit

CN2

CN5

Feeder/Paddle motors and sensors

Main tray motor and sensors


Connector Connection

CN1 Push holder solenoid

CN13

CN4

CN14

Stapler cover solenoid

Tamper/Ejector motors and sensors

SCU solenoid

2-101


2.14. Wireless LAN Option

This option will enable wireless printing without the additional wireless AP.

•

Support model

-

CLX-9301 / 9251 / 9201 series

-

SCX-8128 / 8123 series

-

CLX-9352 / 9252 series

-

SCX-8240 / 8230 series

-

CLX-8650 / 8640 series

•

Sales Target Subsidiaries

Region

EU

North America

1st Target

SEG / SEI / SEUK / SEF

SEA

•

Specification

Item

Wireless LAN

Security

Wi-Fi

NFC

Host Interface

Dimension

Weight

2nd Target

SENA / SEBN / SEPOL / SEAG

SECA

Description

2.4 GHz Single Band

IEEE 802.11 b/g/n compliant

WEP, WPA-PSK, WMM, WMM-PS, TKIP, and AES hardware acceleration

WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) compatible

Wi-Fi Direct™ compatible

NFC (Passive type)

USB 2.0

205.0*145.0*55.0 mm

0.16Kg


•

Component


1 Wireless Kit

4

5

2

3

USB Extension cable

Internal Harness for

CLX-9x52/SCX-82x0

NFC Tag

NFC Guide Sticker

NOTE

For installing this option, refer to QIG(Quick Installation Guide).

NFC Tag write

•

Summary

•

•

•

•

JC63–04415A [COVER-WLAN]

JC63–04416A [COVER-WLAN LOWER]

JC92–02308A [PBA-WNPC]

JC39–02052A [HARNESS-WLAN]

JC39–02053A [HARNESS-WLAN EXTENSION]

JC39–01192A [HARNESS-WIRELESS LAN]

JC68–03012A [LABEL ETC-NFC TECTILE STICKER]

JC68–03048A [LABEL VER-INFORMATION]


2-103


1) PIN code

• Check the current PIN code of printer using print report(Network setting).

• Printer : “Setup” → “Reports” → “Print”

• “Wi-Fi Direct Information” >

*“WPS-PIN for NFC”

2) NFC Setting

• NFC option of mobile phone should be turned on before using tag writer

-

Android 4.1 : Settings → WIRELESS & NETWORKS More… → NFC checkbox

Android 4.0 : Settings → WIRELESS & NETWORK NFC On

3) NFC Tag Writing App (This application will be issued via service bulletin by HQ CS) a) Install the App.

b) Run NFC Writer

NOTE

Please turn on the WiFi before checking WPS-PIN for NFC value

2-104 c) Search for Wi-Fi Direct printers. Select target printer.


NOTE

Wi-Fi Direct should be turned on in both printer and mobile phone.

2. Product Specifications and Description d) Model information : Model Name, MAC Address, AAR

Need to insert PIN code if target model supports WFD PIN connection. (NFC model) e) Touch mobile phone to NFC tag, and then it will show “Tag written successfully” message.

NOTE

If there occurs an error while writing NFC tag, try to touch NFC tag again.


2-105



3. Disassembly and Reassembly

3. Disassembly and Reassembly

3.1. Precautions when replacing parts

3.1.1. Precautions when assembling and disassembling

•

Use only approved Samsung spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature rating are correct. Failure to do so could result in damage to the machine, circuit overload, fire or electric shock.

•

Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the printer, these could cause the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

•

Take care when dismantling the unit to note where each screw goes. There are 19 different screws. Use of the wrong screw could lead to system failure, short circuit or electric shock.

•

Do not disassemble the LSU unit. Once it is disassembled dust is admitted to the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside.

•

Regularly check the condition of the power cord, plug and socket. Bad contacts could lead to overheating and firfe.

Damaged cables could lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

3.1.2. Precautions when handling PBA

Static electricity can damage a PBA, always used approved anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PBA.

•

Precautions when moving and storing PBA

1) Please keep PBA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

2) Do not store a PBA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

•

Precautions when replacing PBA

1) Disconnect power connectors first, before disconnecting other cables.

2) Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals or other electronic parts when handling insulated parts.

•

Precautions when checking PBA

1) Before touching a PBA, please touch other grounded areas of the chassis to discharge any static electrical charge on the body.

2) Take care not to touch the PBA with your bare hands or metal objects as you could create a short circuit or get an electric shock. Take extra care when handling PBAs with moving parts fitted such as sensors, motors or lamps as they may get hot.

3) Take care when fitting, or removing, screws. Look out for hidden screws. Always ensure that the correct screw is used and always ensure that when toothed washers are removed they are refitted in their original positions.


3-1


3.1.3. Releasing Plastic Latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches break easily; release them carefully.

To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.



3.2. Maintenance

3.2.1. Machine Cleaning for maintenance

3.2.1.1. Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window

1.

Open the side cover.

3.

Close the side cover.

4.

Enter the SVC mode. Select “

CTD Sensor Cleaning

”.

(Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Tone

Adjustment Condition > CTD Sensor Cleaning)

5.

When appearing the confirm popup menu, select “Yes” button on screen.

2.

Clean the sensor window[A] by using a soft cloth.

NOTE

If you don’t execute “CTD sensor cleaning” menu on

SVC mode after cleaning the sensor window, the error message will not disappear.


3-3


3.2.1.2. Cleaning the LSU window

1.

Open the front cover. Remove the waste toner container[A].

3.

Insert the LSU window cleaning tool to each color hole.

2.

Take out the LSU window cleaning tool that is located on the front cover.

4.

Slowly pull out and push the cleaning tool.

5.

Repeat step 4 at least 5 times for each LSU window.


3.2.1.3. Cleaning the transfer roller

1.



2.

Clean the transfer roller[A] by using a soft cloth.

3.2.1.4. Cleaning the scan glass

1.

Open the DADF Unit.

2.

Clean the scan glass[A] by using a soft cloth.


3-5


3.2.2. Replacing the maintenance part

3.2.2.1. Drum Unit

1.

Open the front cover.

3.

Turn the green lever counterclockwise.

2.

Remove the waste toner container.

4.

Hold the Drum unit and take it out.



3.2.2.2. Developer Unit

1.

Turn the machine off. Then remove the corresponding drum unit. (Refer to 3.2.2.1)

2.

Pull down the toner supply shutter.

4.

Remove the bracket[A] after removing 2 screws.

Unplug the connector.

3.

Push the toner supply shutter to the direction of arrow.

And then release the toner supply cap.

5.

Remove the developer unit.


NOTE

It is not possible to change the carriers in developer unit for CLX-9201/9251/9301 series. You must replace the whole Developer Unit.

6.

Install the new developer unit.

7.

Turn the machine on while the front cover is opened.

NOTE

1)

When replacing the developer unit, SVC engineer must execute “Life Count Update” and “TC calibration”.

2) If you turn on the machine after closing the front cover, toner will be supplied without TC calibration.

It may affect the image quality.

8.

When the control panel is activated, select “Developer

Unit” menu. (Information > supply Status > Field

Replacement Unit > Developer Unit)

3-7


9.

Select the “Developer Unit” for all colors that is replaced.

10.

Push the OK button

11.

Close the front cover.

NOTE

TC calibration will start. Please wait until warm-up operation is completed.



3.2.2.3. ITB Cleaner

1.

Open the front cover.

2.

Loosen a screw. (Note : Less than torque 6kgf.cm)

3.

Release the ITB Cleaner.

3.2.2.4. ITB Unit

1.

Remove the ITB cleaner. (Refer to 3.2.2.3)

2.


4.

Release the left stopper.

3.

Release the right stopper.


3-9


5.

Unplug the ITB connector from the right. Pull the holder to the front.

7.

Pull out the ITB unit until the green handles are shown totally. Change your grip and release the ITB unit perfectly.

6.

Remove 2 screws.

3-10

8.

Before install the new ITB unit, align the CAM position. (Align 2 arrows)

9.

Install the new ITB unit. And then install the ITB cleaner. (Note : Less than torque 6kgf.cm)


3.2.2.5. Fuser unit

1.


2.

Remove the fuser unit after removing 2 screws.


3.2.2.6. Transfer roller

1.


2.

Hold and release the both sides of the transfer roller.


3-11


3.2.2.7. Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller

1.

Open the side cover. Remove 2 cassettes.

2.

Lift small tap, remove the pick up / reverse/ forward roller.

NOTE

When replacing these rollers, it is recommended that you replace all three rollers at the same time.

3.

Enter SVC mode. Select the menu. (Information >

Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit). Push “Reset” button to reset the current count to 0.



3.2.2.8. MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller

1.

Open the MP tray. Remove the cover[A].

3.

Lift small tap, remove the MP pick up / reverse/ forward roller.

2.

Remove the cover [B].

NOTE

When replacing these rollers, it is recommended that you replace all three rollers at the same time.

4.




3-13


3.2.2.9. DADF Pick-up roller Assy

1.

Open the DADF-open cover.

2.

Remove the spring.

3.

Remove the DADF Pick-up roller Assy after releasing

2 hooks.

3.2.2.10. DADF friction pad

1.

Open the DADF-open cover.

4.



2.

Remove the DADF friction pad.


3.3. Replacing the main SVC part

3.3.1. Left Cover

1.

Remove the left cover after removing 9 screws.


3.3.2. Rear Cover

1.

Remove the rear cover after removing 10 screws.


3-15


3.3.3. HVPS board

1.

Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1)

2.

Remove 4 screws. Release the middle hook.

3.

Unplug the connector. Remove the HVPS board.

3.3.4. Temperature Sensor

1.


2.

Remove the sensor after unplugging the connector.


3.3.5. LSU

1.


2.

Remove the HVPS board. (Refer to 3.3.3)

3.

Remove the bracket after removing 2 screws.

4.

Remove 2 screws. Take out the LSU slowly.


CAUTION

If you yank the LSU, the LSU harness may be damaged.

5.

Unplug the LSU harness from the left. Remove the

LSU.


3-17


3.3.6. OPE Unit

1.

Remove the OPE overlay cover.

4.

Remove 2 screws from the front.

2.

Remove the sticker covering the screw hole.

5.

Open the side cover. Remove 2 screws.

3.

Remove the cover[A] after removing 2 screws.

6.

Remove the cover[B].


7.

Open the DADF unit. Remove 5 screws.

9.

Remove 5 screws.


10.

Lift up the OPE unit.

8.

Remove the cover [C].

11.

Turn the OPE unit. Unplug all connectors connecting the machine.


3-19


12.

Unplug all connectors on OPE Main PBA. Remove 4 screws. And then remove the OPE Main PBA.

14.

Remove the LCD.

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage flat cables.

13.

Remove 7 screws. Lift up the OPE bracket.

15.

Remove the OPE key PBA.


3.3.7. Main board

1.

Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2)

2.

Unplug all connector on the main board.

3.

Remove the main board after removing 9 screws.


4.

Install the new main board and insert the MSOK and memory.

NOTE

When inserting the MSOK, be careful its direction.

CAUTION

When re-assembling the main board, be careful of swapping the MAIN BLDC connector[A] and DCF connector[B].


3-21


3.3.8. SMPS Fan

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 1 screw. And then remove the SMPS fan.



3.3.9. SMPS board

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 4 screws. And then remove the SMPS cover.

3.

Unplug all connectors on SMPS board. Remove 4 screws. And then remove the SMPS board.

CAUTION

When replacing the SMPS board, please wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You can get a shock by the electric discharge.

3.3.10. FDB board

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 4 screws. And then remove the SMPS cover.

3.

Unplug all connectors on FDB board. Remove 4 screws. And then remove the FDB board.


CAUTION

When replacing the FDB board, please wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You can get a shock by the electric discharge.

3-23


3.3.11. Fuser-Duct Fan

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And the remove the Fuser-Duct.

3.

Release the fan by separating the Fuser-Duct.

3.3.12. Main board shield

1.


2.

Unplug all connectors on the main board.

3.

Remove the main board shield after removing 4 screws.

CAUTION

When assembling the new fan, be careful not to change the fan direction. The label must be shown on the outside.



3.3.13. Main Drive unit

1.

Remove all developer units and drum units.

2.


3.

Unplug all connectors connecting the main drive unit.

Release the harness from the holder.

4.

Remove the main drive unit after removing 9 screws.

3.3.14. Fuser/Exit Drive unit

1.


2.

Unplug 2 motor connectors. Remove 3 screws. And then remove the Fuser/Exit Drive unit.


3-25


3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And then

Pick-up Drive unit1.

3.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And then

Pick-up Drive unit2.

3.3.16. Feed Drive unit

1.


2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And then remove the Feed Drive Unit.


3.3.17. Regi_MP Drive unit

1.



2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And the remove the Regi_MP Drive Unit.

3.3.18. Toner Supply Drive unit

1.


2.

Remove the Main board shield. (Refer to 3.3.12)

3.

Unplug the connector. Remove 2 screws. And then remove the Toner supply drive unit.

NOTE

• To remove K Toner supply drive unit, first remove the main drive unit.

• The toner supply drive units are exchangeable.


3-27


3.3.19. Waste toner container Drive unit

1.

Open the front cover. Remove all toner cartridges.

2.

Unplug 4 connectors connecting the developer units.

3.

Remove the inner cover after removing 8 screws.

4.

Unplug the connectors. Remove 2 screws. And then remove the Waste toner container drive unit.

3.3.20. Auto Size sensor

1.

Remove all cassettes. See the machine inside.

2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 2 screws. And then remove the sensor.



3.3.21. Exit Unit

1.

Open the side cover. Unplug the Exit unit connector.

2.

Remove the Exit unit after removing 3 screws.


3-29


3.3.22. Side Unit

1.

Remove the cover [A] after removing 3 screws.

3.

Release the right stopper.

2.

Unplug the side unit connector.

CAUTION

The spring tension for right stopper is strong. When releasing it, be careful not to hurt yourself.

4.

Release the left stopper.

5.

Remove the Side Unit.



3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor

1.

Remove 2 screws from the both sides. Lift up the

Cover-side exit.

3.

Separate the Cover-side exit after removing 3 screws.

2.

Remove the Cover-side exit after unplugging the connector.

4.

Remove the Fuser out sensor after unplugging the connector.


3-31


3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor

1.

Remove the transfer roller Assy.

3.

Remove the Duplex sensor [A] and Curl sensor [B].

2.

Remove 1 screw. Turn over the Guide-TR Upper.


3.3.22.3. MP unit

1.

Remove the Harness-Cover [A] after removing 2 screws.

4.

Remove 3 screws.


2.

Remove the Harness-Cover Lower [B] after removing

2 screws.

5.

Remove 1 screw.

3.

Remove 1 screws. Stand the stopper.

6.

Remove 2 screws.


3-33


7.

Remove 4 screws.

10.

Remove 2 screws.

8.

Remove the Cover-Side Guide Feed[C].

11.

Unplug the connectors.

9.

Lift up the Cover-Side Duplex Lower.

12.

Remove the Cover-MP Front.


13.

Release the Linker from the right of the MP tray.


16.

Remove the gear [C] after removing the E-ring.

14.

Remove the MP Unit.

17.

Remove the Bush[D] after removing the E-ring.

15.

Remove the MP-cover base.

18.

Remove the Bracket-Solenoid after removing 1 screw.


3-35


19.

Release the MP bracket pick-up after removing 4 screws.

20.

Remove the MP solenoid after removing 2 screws.


3.3.23. Fuser unit

1.



4.

Remove the Frame-Fuser Rear[B] after removing 3 screws.

2.

Remove the fuser unit after removing 2 screws.

5.

Remove the Fuser-Guide Duplex[C] after removing 3 screws.

3.

Remove the Frame-Fuser Front[A] after removing 3 screws.

6.

Remove the Fuser-Bracket Top after removing 5 screws.


3-37


7.

Remove 2 screws.

10.

Release the pin connector with the tweezers.

8.

Remove 6 screws. Remove the Holder-Bias. And remove the Bracket-Fuser Bottom.

9.

Remove 2 screws. Unplug the thermostat connector.

CAUTION

• When reassembling the pin connector, make sure the colors are positioned as shown above.

• Check the connector assembly status. If there is a wrong connection, a operation error or a fire can happen.

• Be careful not to bend the connector.

11.

Lift up the thermostat holder Assy.

3-38

12.

Remove 3 screws. Lift up and release the thermostat holder.



15.

Straighten the bent thermostat harness.

13.

Release the NC sensor.

16.

Take out the halogen lamp carefully.

14.

Remove 1 screw.


3-39


3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and sensor

1.

Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.22)

2.

Remove the Pick-up Unit1,2 after removing 2 screws.

3.

Release the sensor after unplugging the connector.

(Empty sensor[A], Level sensor[B])

3.3.25. Feed sensor

1.


2.

Remove the sensor cover after removing 2 screws.

4.

Remove the Feed sensor after unplugging connector.

3.

Release the sensor holder after removing 1 screw.



3.3.26. Feed Unit

1.


2.

Remove the Feed Unit[A] after removing 1 screw.

4.

Remove the feed sensor after unplugging the connector.

3.

Remove the bracket[B] after removing 3 screws.


3-41


3.3.27. Registration Unit

1.


2.

Remove the Regi.unit [A] after removing 2 screws.

4.

Remove the Regi. sensor after unplugging the connector.

3.

Remove the bracket[B] after removing 3 screws.


3.3.28. DADF Unit

1.

Remove the DADF connector cover.


3.

Lift up the DADF unit and release it to diagonal direction.

2.

Remove 1 screw. Unplug the connector.


3-43


3.3.28.1. DADF Cover

1.

Open the Stacker and Cover-Open. Remove 2 screws.

4.

Remove the Cover-Deco F.

2.

Remove the Cover-Side R by releasing the bottom hooks.

5.

Remove 2 screw.

6.

Release the hook from the bottom.

3.

Remove 3 screws.


7.

Remove the Cover-Side F.



3-45


3.3.28.2. DADF Open Cover

1.

Remove the DADF cover. (Refer to 3.3.28.1)

2.

Release the DADF Open Cover by pushing it to the direction of arrow.

3.3.28.3. DADF Stacker

1.


2.

Release the Stacker by pushing it and its holder in the opposite direction.

3.3.28.4. DADF main board

1.

Remove the Cover-Side R. (Refer to 3.3.28.1)

2.

Unplug all connectors on the board.

3.

Remove the DADF main board after removing 2 screws.



3.3.28.5. DADF motor_solenoid_clutch

1.


2.

Unplug all connectors on the DADF board.

5.

Lift up and release the DADF Frame Main after removing 2 screws.

3.

Remove 1 screw.

6.

Release the harness holder after removing 2 screw.

4.

Remove 2 screws.

7.

Unplug the connector. Remove 4 screws. And release the motor.


3-47


8.

Release the solenoid after removing 2 screws.

10.

Remove the clutch.

9.

Remove 2 springs. Remove 2 screws. And release the bracket.


3.3.28.6. DADF Regi_Cover_Detect sensor

1.

Release the corresponding sensor after unplugging connector.

• A : Detect sensor

• B : Cover sensor

• C : Registration sensor


3.3.28.7. DADF Exit Idle sensor

1.

Remove the motor bracket. (Refer to 3.3.28.4)

2.



3-49


3.3.28.8. DADF Exit sensor

1.

Remove the DADF Frame-Main. (Refer to 3.3.28.4)

2.


3.3.28.9. DADF Length_Width sensor

1.

Remove the DADF Stacker. (Refer to 3.3.28.3)

2.

Release the sensor cover after removing 3 screws.

3.

Remove the defective sensor after unplugging the connector.

• A, B : Paper Length sensor

• C, D, E : Paper Width sensor



3.3.29. Scanner Unit

3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board

1.

Remove the DADF unit. (Refer to 3.3.28)

2.

Remove the Scan-Rear cover after removing 7 screws.

3.

Unplug all connector. Remove 2 screws. And release the scanner joint board.


3-51


3.3.29.2. Scan glass

1.

Open and stand the DADF unit at 90 degree angle.

2.

Remove 5 screws.

3.

Remove the COVER-GLASS and ADF GLASS.

4.

Lift up and release the scan glass.



3.3.29.3. APS sensor

1.

Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.3.29.2)

2.

Remove the align cover after removing 4 screws.

4.

Release the APS sensor after remove 2 screws.

3.

Remove 1 screw. Turn over the holder.


3-53


3.3.29.4. FR module

1.

Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.3.29.2)

2.

Remove 2 screws.

4.

Unplug the harness.

NOTE

Before removing the below screw, mark the current gradation position to tighten the screw in the same position.

3.

Release the FR module.



3.3.29.5. Scanner Assy

1.

Remove the DADF unit and OPE unit. (Refer to 3.3.7

and 3.3.28)

2.

Unplug all connectors on the main board.

4.

Remove 2 screws from the right.

3.

Remove 3 screws from the left.

5.

Lift up and release the scanner Assy.


3-55


3.3.30. Side Cover Open Switch

1.

Remove the rear cover. Remove 1 screw securing the sensor.

2.

Remove the micro-switch.

3.3.31. Front Cover Open Switch

1.

Remove the COVER FRONT TOP[A] and COVER

FRONT TOP DECO[B]. (Refer to 3.3.6 OPE unit)

4.

Remove the inner cover.

5.

Remove the cover open switch.

2.

Remove all toner cartridges.

3.

Unplug 4 connectors and 8 screws.


3.3.32. Replacing the HDD

1.

Remove the screw cover sheet.


3.

Remove the COVER-EXIT REAR [C] after removing

5 screws.

2.

Remove the Exit-Cover [B].

4.

Remove 4 screws. Unplug the cable. And remove the

HDD Assy.

5.

Install the new HDD Assy.


3-57


3.3.33. DCF (Double Cassette Feeder)

3.3.33.1. DCF main board

1.

Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 screws.

2.

Unplug all connectors. Remove 4 screws. And release the DCF main board.



3.3.33.2. DCF Feed Motor

1.


3.

Remove 3 E-rings and 3 gears. Remove 2 screws. And release the feed motor.

2.

Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And release the Feed Drive unit.

3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor

1.


2.

Unplug the pick up motor connector. Remove 2 screws.

And release the DCF pick up motor.


3-59


3.3.34. Finisher

3.3.34.1. Finisher Main Motor

1.

Remove the rear cover after 3 screws.

3.

Remove 2 screws.

3-60

4.

Remove the jam cover.

2.

Remove 2 screws.

5.

Remove 5 screws

6.

Remove the Top-Tray.



7.

Remove the drive gear after removing the E-ring.

NOTE

When reassembling the Top-Tray, check that the suppresser is in right position.

8.

Release the exit roller.

9.

Remove the Bottom-Guide after removing 4 screws.


3-61


10.

Remove the Main motor after removing 2 screws.



3.3.34.2. Finisher Board

1.

Remove the rear cover after removing 3 screws.

2.

Disconnect all cables on finisher board.

3.

Remove the finisher board after removing 4 screws.


3-63

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting

4.1. Control panel

1

7

3 4 5

8

1 1

6

9

10

12

13

14

15

1 Display screen

2

3

Status LED

Job Status

6

7

4

5

Counter

Eco

Clear

Numeric keypad

8

9

Reset

Redial/Pause

10

11

Log in/Logout

On Hook Dial

12 Power

2

13

14

15

Interrupt

Stop

Start

Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily using the display screen.

Shows the status of your machine

Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs, completed jobs, current error code or secured jobs.

Shows the amount of paper used.

Turn into Eco mode.

Deletes characters in the edit area.

Dials numbers and enters alphanumeric characters. You can also enter the number value for document copies or other options.

Resets the current machine’s setup.

Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.

Allows user to log in or log out.

When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number.

It is similar to making a call using speaker phone.

Turn the power on or off. When the blue LED is on, the machine is powered on and you can use it. If you turn the machine off, press this button for more than three seconds. Press Yes when the confirmation window appears.

Stops a job in operation for urgent copying.

Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume.

Starts a job.

CAUTION

When you use the display screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.


4. Troubleshooting

4.1.1. Introducing the display screen and useful buttons

Display screen

NOTE

For more information, refer to the user guide.

The display screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you press the home icon on the screen, it shows the display screen. The display screen image in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.

•

Copy : Enters the Copy menu.

•

Fax : Enters the Fax menu. Fax is activated on the display screen by installing an optional fax kit.

•

Stored Document : Enters the Stored Document menu.

•

Shared Folder : Enters the Shared Folder menu.

•

Scan to Email : Enters the Scan to Email menu.

•

Scan to Server : Enters the Scan to Server menu.

•

Scan to PC : Enters the Scan to PC menu.

•

Scan to Shared Folder : Enters the Scan to Shared Folder menu.

•

Quick Copy : Enters the Quick Copy menu.

•

ID Copy : Enters the ID Copy menu.

•

USB : Enters the USB menu. When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine,

USB is activated on the display screen.

•

Scan to USB : Enters the Scan to USB menu. When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, Scan to USB is activated on the display screen

•

Machine Setup : You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.


4-2

4. Troubleshooting

Counter button

When you press the Counter button on the control panel, You can see the number of impressions.

•

Total Usage : Displays the total number of impressions.

•

Large Page : Displays the total number of impressions with large size paper.

•

Send Usage : Displays the number of images sent via email, server, etc.

•

Fax Send Usage(PSTN) : Displays the number of sent faxes.

Eco button

The eco feature allows you to save print resources and leads you to eco-friendly printing. When you press the Eco button, the machine turns eco mode on or off. If the eco mode is on, you can see the eco image on some features. Some options in the features are not available to use in the eco mode. For detailed information about the eco feature, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

Job Status button

When you press the Job Status button, the screen lists the currently running, queued, and completed jobs.


4. Troubleshooting

4.2. Understanding the status LED

The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.

Status

Off

Green

Red

On

Blinking

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes.

Copy

Scan

Print

The machine is copying documents.

The machine is scanning documents.

•

•

When the status LED slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.

When the status LED blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.

On

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Blinking •

•

•

Description

The machine is off-line.

The machine is in power saver mode. When data is received, or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.

•

The imaging unit is at the end of its lifespan. Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one.

The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.

A paper jam has occurred.

The door is open. Close the door.

There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.

The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.

The waste toner container is not installed in the machine, or full waste toner container.

A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes its original task.

The toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container is near the end of its life. Order a new toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container. You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.


4-4

4. Troubleshooting

4.3. Updating Firmware

This chapter includes instructions for updating the printer firmware. You can update the printer firmware by using one of the following methods :

•

Update the firmware by using the printer control panel

•

Update the firmware by using the network.

4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this printer. Follow all of the instructions carefully.

1) Download the firmware file from the Global Service Partner Network (GSPN) website.

2) Unzip the firmware file to a folder on your PC.

3) Copy the firmware file (*.hds) to a USB flash drive.

NOTE

The firmware files may be up to 500MB in size. USB flash drive size must be a minimum of 2 GB.

4) Press the button on control panel in this order. (

Machine Setup > Others > Application Management > Application

)

5) Plug the USB flash drive into the USB port. “Install” button will be activated on the Application tab. Press the “Install” button.


4. Troubleshooting

6) The installation window will list the files on the USB drive. Touch the name of the firmware file to select it.

7) Press the “OK” button after marking the check box.

8) Once the installation is complete, “OK” button will be activated. Press “OK” button.

9) After completing the update, you can find the updated versions at [Machine Setup] > [Machine Details] > [Software

Versions].


4-6

4. Troubleshooting

4.3.2. Updating from the Network

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this printer. Follow all of the instructions carefully.

Perform the following procedure to update the printer firmware from the network.

1) Go to the SyncThruWeb Service (SWS) main home page. Click [

Login

] to access as default administrator as shown below.

NOTE

Login using the Administrator ID and Password established during initial machine setup.

2) Click [

Maintenance

] on the top menu. And then click [

Firmware Upgrade

].


3) Click [Upgrade Wizard].

4) Click [Browse]. Choose installation file by browsing file system. And click [Next].

5) The uploading step will start. After this step, next step will be started automatically.

4. Troubleshooting


4-8

4. Troubleshooting

6) The firmware update will start.

7) Once the installation is complete, the machine power-off and power-on automatically.


4. Troubleshooting

4.4. Service Mode (Tech Mode)

4.4.1. Entering/Exiting Service Mode

To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934” and press the “OK” button.

To exit the service mode, press the “Exit Service” button at the right upper corner of the display.


4-10

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.2. Service Mode Menu Tree

a) Information Tab

Level 1 Level 2

General

Level 3

Machine Serial Number

Network IP Address

Total Printed Impressions

Machine Installed Date & Time

Customer Replacement Unit

Supply Status

Field Replacement Unit

Level 4

Toner

OPC Unit

Developer Unit

Developer

Waste Toner Container

Finisher

ITB

Fuser

Roller

DADF Roller

Information

Software

Version

Service Hours

Power On Hours

Low Power Hours

Power Save Hours

Fault Log

Print Reports

Export Reports

Supplies Information

Fax Protocol Dump

Auto Color Registration

Maintenance

Job Duty

Auto Color Toning History

Manual Toning History

Usage Counter

Full Auto Color Registration

RTF Format

XML Format

PDF Format

Page

Page 4–15

Page 4–15

Page 4–16

Page 4–16

Page 4–16

Page 4–17

Page 4–18


b) Maintenance Counts Tab

Level 1 Level 2

Fault Counts

Maintenance

Counts

Level 3 Level 4

Jam Count

Print Jam

Scan Jam

Part

Replacement

Count

Finisher

Handling Count

Toner Cartridge

OPC Unit

Developer Unit

Developer

ITB

Fuser

Roller

DADF Roller

Sheets Delivered to Top Tray

Sheets Delivered to Finishing Tray

Finisher Set Count

Pick-up Jam

Feed Jam

Duplex Jam

Exit Jam

Feed Jam

Regi Jam

Scan Jam

Exit Jam

Duplex Regi Jam

Duplex Scan Jam

Duplex Exit Jam

4. Troubleshooting

Page

Page 4–19

Page 4–19

Page 4–20

Page 4–21


4-12

4. Troubleshooting

c) Diagnostics Tab

Level 1 Level 2

Engine

Diagnostics

Fax Diagnostics

Level 3

Engine NVM Initialization

Engine NVM Read/Write

Engine Test Routines

Fax NVM Read/Write

Fax Test Routines

Diagnostics

Scanner

Diagnostics

Adjustment

ACS

Image

Management

Level 4

Shading Test

Shade and Print Report

Print Last Shade Report

Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

Scanner/DADF Test Routines

Print Adjustment

Copy Adjustment

Scan Area Adjustment

DADF Adjustment

Automatic Adjustment

Magnification

Image Position

Print Test Patterns

Image Position


Manual Adjustment


Manual Adjustment

ACS Level Adjustment

Auto Color Registration

Manual Color Registration

Auto Tone Adjustment Activation

Auto Tone Adjustment

Normal

Full

Normal

Full

CTD Sensor Cleaning

Print Test

Patterns

Skew Pattern

Page

Page 4–22

Page 4–22

Page 4–24

Page 4–28

Page 4–29

Page 4–30

Page 4–30

Page 4–31

Page 4–32

Page 4–33

Page 4–33

Page 4–34

Page 4–35

Page 4–36

Page 4–37

Page 4–38

Page 4–39

Page 4–39

Page 4–40

Page 4–41

Page 4–42

Page 4–42


d) Service Functions

Level 1 Level 2

Main Memory

Clear

Service

Functions

Level 3

Hard Disk

Maintenance

EIUL

Count Setting of Large Pages

Toner Save

Device Configuration Data Clear

Temporary & Spool Data Clear

User Saved Data & Log Clear

All Saved Data Clear

Hard Disk Check

Hard Disk Access

HDD Encryption

On/Off

1 Count Up

2 Count Up

Port

Enable Telent

Enable OSGI

Enable Samba

Off / Job Status / Details Debug Log

Capture Log

System

Recovery

SYS

ALL

TR Control

Mode

T1 Control

T2 Control

Level 4

Process Speed

Paper for Driver

T1 PWM

Paper Group

Paper Side

Paper Direction

T2 PWM

User Data

Management

Clear System

Cache

Enhanced

Security

Hibernation

Back up

Restore

Off/On

Off/Om

4. Troubleshooting

Page

Page 4–43

Page 4–43

Page 4–43

Page 4–43

Page 4–44

Page 4–44

Page 4–44

Page 4–45

Page 4–48

Page 4–49


4-14

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.3. Information

4.4.3.1. General

•

Information > General

This menu displays the machine’s serial number, assigned IP address, total printed impressions, and the machine installed date.

4.4.3.2. Supply Status

Customer Replacement Unit (CRU)

•

Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

This menu displays the machine’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the information of the selected unit.

Field Replacement Unit (FRU)

•

Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

This menu displays the machine’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the information of the selected unit.

In the CRU and FRU list, there are four columns : items, status, current, max life.

•

Item : Refer to the table below.

•

Status : This shows the current status of the selected item.

-

OK : The current count is smaller than the default warning value

-

Check : The current count is bigger than default warning value

-

Off : The current count exceeds the max life.

•

Count : This shows the current count of the selected item.

•

Max. life : This shows the max capacity of the selected item.

Users can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.

Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to 0 after replacing the unit.

Unit

Toner

OPC Unit

Item

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Black

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Black

Max. Life

15K

15K

15K

20K

50K

50K

50K

50K

Default

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

Threshold

1~ 30%

1~ 30%

1~ 30%

1~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%


Unit Item

Yellow

Magenta

Max. Life

300K

300K

Developer Unit

ITB

Cyan

Black

300K

300K

Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container 50K

Finisher

Finisher Stapler

Cartridge

NA

ITB

ITB Cleaner

300K (PM Count)

150K (PM Count)

Fuser

Roller

DADF Roller

T2 Roller

Fuser

P/up Roller MP

P/up Roller Kit-tray1

150K (PM Count)

150K (PM Count)

200K (PM Count)

200K (PM Count)



200K (PM Count)

200K (PM Count)

P/up Roller Kit-tray4 200K (PM Count)

Assembly ADF Roller 200K (PM Count)

Default

10%

10%

10%

10%

Near Full

Near Empty

5%

5%

10%

10%

10%

10%

5%

10%

10%

10%

4.4.3.3. Software Version

•

Information > Software Version

This menu displays all the version of the software installed in the system in detail.

4.4.3.4. Service Hours

•

Information > Service Hours

This menu displays three items, “Power on Hours”, “Low Power Hours” and “Power Save Hours”.

-

Power on Hours : It indicates the hours of system power on since the first booting of the system.

-

Low Power Hours : It indicates the hours of system low power on since the first booting of the system.

-

Power Save Hours : It indicates the hours of system power save since the first booting of the system.

4.4.3.5. Fault Log

•

Information > Fault Log

This menu displays faults occurred while the system was operating.

Pressing clear button will clear all the save fault log of the system.

4. Troubleshooting

Threshold

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

5 ~ 30%

NA

NA

2% ~ 10%

3% ~ 10%

3% ~ 10%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%

5% ~ 20%


4-16

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.3.6. Print Reports

•

Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports which that can be printed from the system. The following reports will be available to print.

-

Supplies Information

-

Fax Protocol Dump List

-

Auto Color Registration Result

-

Full Auto Color Registration Result

-

Maintenance

-

Job Duty

-

Auto Toning History

-

Manual Toning History

-

Usage Counter Report

Auto Color Registration

•

Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration

This report lists last 10 Auto Color Registration results.

If there is color registration problem , and execution of Auto Color Registration does not solve the problem, service engineers can print out this report and check “Succeeded or Failed for ACR” field.

Result

0

256

1152

Meaning

Success

Pattern Sensing Sensor LED calibration failure

Machine can’t read the pattern. So, the machine can’t execute the calibration.

Auto Toning History and Manual Toning History

•

Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History

•

Information > Print Reports > Manual Toning History

NOTE

TRC means “Tone Reproduction Curve”.

This report shows history of execution of TRC control. TRC control preserves color consistency against changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is to check if TRC control works normally.

•

If TRC control performs normally, “Pass” count must be non-zero value and “Fail” count must be zero.

•

If “Fail” count is not zero, the image density sensor needs to be checked.


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.3.7. Export Reports

•

Information > Export Reports

This menu exports report to usb stick. Configuration, Error Information, Supplies Information, Usage Counter Reports are exported as the form of selected format.


4-18

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.4. Maintenance Counts

4.4.4.1. Fault Count

•

Maintenance Counts > Fault Count

This menu displays the fault Counts of the system. Users can select one fault group and press “OK” to see detailed fault descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic code and descriptions of the fault along with the number of occurrences.

The following list shows the group of the faults defined for the system.

A1 Motor

A2 Fan

A3 Sensor

C1 Toner Cartridge Unit

C3 Imaging Unit

C4 Developer Unit

C6 iTB

C7 Fusing unit

H1 Input (Trays) System

H2 Output (Bins) System

M1 Input (Trays) System

M2 Media Path System

M3 Output (Bins) System

M4 Auto Document Feeder System

S1 Video System

S2 Engine System

S3 Scan System

S4 Fax System

S5 UI System

S6 Network System

S7 HDD System

U1 Fusing Unit

U2 LSU Unit

4.4.4.2. Jam Count

•

Maintenance Counts > Jam Count

This menu displays the jam Counts of the system. Users can select one jam group, which indicates the location of jams, and press “OK” to see a detailed jam location along with the occurrence of the jam.

The following table shows the jam groups defined for the system :

Level 1 Level 2

Print Jam

Pick-up Jam

Feed Jam

Duplex Jam

Level 3

Jam Bypass

Jam 0 Tray 1

Jam 0 Tray 2

Jam 0 Tray 3 (DCF)

Jam 0 Tray 4 (DCF)

Jam Feed 1

Jam Feed 2

Jam Feed 3 (DCF)

Jam Feed 4 (DCF)

Jam Regi

Jam Fuser Out

Jam Duplex 1

Jam Duplex 2

Jam Duplex Regi

Jam Duplex Return


Level 1

Scan Jam

Level 2

Exit Jam

Feed Jam

Regi Jam

Scan Jam

Exit Jam

Duplex Regi Jam

Duplex Scan Jam

Duplex Exit Jam

4. Troubleshooting

Level 3

Jam Exit In (Face Down)

Jam Exit Out (Face Down)

Jam Exit In (Inner)

Jam Exit Out (Inner)

Feed In Jam

Feed Out Jam

Feed Idle Jam

Regi In Jam

Regi Out Jam

Regi Idle Jam

Scan In Jam

Scan Out Jam

Scan Idle Jam

Exit In Jam

Exit Out Jam

Exit Idle Jam

Duplex Regi In Jam

Duplex Regi Out Jam

Duplex Regi Idle Jam

Duplex Scan In Jam

Duplex Scan Out Jam

Duplex Scan Idle Jam

Duplex Exit In Jam

Duplex Exit Out Jam

Duplex Exit Idle Jam

4.4.4.3. Part Replacement Count

•

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

This menu displays the replacement Counts for the system parts. Users can select one part group and press “OK” to see the exact name of the part along with the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows groups of the replaceable parts of the system.


4-20

4. Troubleshooting

Unit

Toner Cartridge

OPC Unit

Developer Unit

Developer

ITB

Fuser

Roller

DADF Roller

Item

Toner (Yellow)

Toner (Magenta)

Toner (Cyan)

Toner (Black)

OPC Unit (Yellow)

OPC Unit (Magenta)

OPC Unit (Cyan)

OPC Unit (Black)

Developer Unit (Yellow)

Developer Unit (Magenta)

Developer (Cyan)

Developer (Black)

Developer (Yellow)

Developer (Magenta)

Developer (Cyan)

Developer (Black)

ITB

ITB Cleaner

T2 Roller

Fuser

P/up Roller MP





Assembly ADF Roller

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Count Clear

Count Clear

Count Clear

Auto Sensing

Count Clear

Count Clear

Count Clear

Count Clear

Count Clear

Count Clear

Sensing Method

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

Auto Sensing

4.4.4.4. Finisher Handling Count

•

Maintenance Counts > Finisher Handling Count

This menu displays the sheet counts delivered to finisher tray and finisher set count. Users can select one item and press

“OK” to see a count information.

NOTE

This menu shall be displayed only if finisher is installed

Finisher Handling Count Sheets Delivered to Top Tray

Sheets Delivered to Finishing Tray

Finisher Set Count


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5. Diagnostics

4.4.5.1. Engine Diagnostics

Engine NVM Initialization

•

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

This menu initializes all engine NVM value to the default.

Engine NVM Read/Write

•

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write

Purpose

Operation

Procedure

To change a configuration value for engine firmware.

When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and saved values.

Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.

Code Display

103-0031 Regi Curl Length

103-0032 Duplex Regi Curl Length

103-0033 Double Speed Duplex Regi Curl Length

109-0000 StandBy Temperature offset

109-0010 Run Temperature offset

109-0050 60 gms Temperature offset

109-0060 90 gms Temperature offset

109-0070 Bond Temperature offset

109-0090 Cardstock Temperature offset

109-0100 Envelopes Temperature offset

109-0110 Labels Temperature offset

109-0130 Thick Temperature Offset

109-0131 Recycled Temperature offset

109-0132 Special Temperature offset

109-0133 1200 dpi_thin temperature offset

109-0134 1200 dpi_plain temperature offset

109-0135 1200 dpi_thick temperature offset

109-0140 Cooldown Mode idling Time1





Meaning

Buckle Control : Regi On Curl

Buckle Control : Duplex Regi On Curl

(x1)

Buckle Control : Duplex Regi On Curl

(x2)

Target Temperature during standby mode.

Target Temperature during run mode.

Media type offset for fuser roll temperature.












Narrow Paper idling Time1(~175

℃

)


℃

)


℃

)


℃

)

Narrow Paper idling Time5(205~

℃

)

Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

10

30

60

90

120

Max/Min

6 / -3

6 / -3

6 / -3

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

5 / -5

150/0

150/0

150/0

150/0

150/0


4-22

4. Troubleshooting

Code Display

112-0120 Manual Color Regi X-offset Yellow

112-0130 Manual Color Regi X-offset Magenta

112-0140 Manual Color Regi X-offset Cyan

112-0150 Manual Color Regi X-offset Black

112-0160 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Yellow

112-0170 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Magenta

Meaning

Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) for yellow

Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) for Magenta

Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) for Cyan

Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) for Black

Distant from psync to Image area for yellow

Distant from psync to Image area for

Magenta

Distant from psync to Image area for Cyan

Distant from psync to Image area for Black

Image Area Width for Yellow

112-0180 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Cyan

112-0190 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Black

112-0200 Manual Color Regi Width Yellow

112-0210 Manual Color Regi Width Magenta

112-0220 Manual Color Regi Width Cyan

112-0230 Manual Color Regi Width Black

112-0240 Manual Color Regi Left Width Yellow

Image Area Width for Magenta

Image Area Width for Cyan

Image Area Width for Black

Image Area Left Width for Yellow

112-0250 Manual Color Regi Right Width Yellow

112-0260 Manual Color Regi Left Width Magenta

Image Area Right Width for Yellow

Image Area Left Width for Magenta

112-0270 Manual Color Regi Right Width Magenta Image Area Right Width for Magenta

112-0280 Manual Color Regi Left Width Cyan Image Area Left Width for Cyan

112-0290 Manual Color Regi Right Width Cyan

112-0300 Manual Color Regi Left Width Black

Image Area Right Width for Cyan

Image Area Left Width for Black

112-0310 Manual Color Regi Right Width Black

112-0320 Color Regi LSU Skew Yellow

112-0330 Color Regi LSU Skew Magenta

112-0340 Color Regi LSU Skew Cyan

Image Area Right Width for Black

LSU Skew for Yellow

LSU Skew for Magenta

LSU Skew for Cyan

Default

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

1000

500

500

500

500

1000

1000

1000

500

500

500

500

100

100

100

Max/Min

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

2000 / 0

2000 / 0

2000 / 0

2000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

1000 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0

200 / 0


4. Troubleshooting

Engine Test Routines

•

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To perform test routines for the engine.

When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines that display along with their descriptions. Users can also directly input an EDC code to the text box to find a routine. Users can select a maximum of 3 routines at the same time.

After selecting one or multiple routines, pressing the “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routines. Users can start/stop a desired test routine.

Code Display

100-0000 Main BLDC Motor

100-0010 Main BLDC Motor Ready

100-0041 OPC Motor Y

100-0042 OPC Motor M

100-0043 OPC Motor C

100-0044 OPC Motor K

100-0046 Y OPC Motor Ready

100-0047 M OPC Motor Ready

100-0048 C OPC Motor Ready

100-0049 K OPC Motor Ready

100-0080 T1 Engage Motor

100-0090 T1 Engae Sensor

100-0120 Exit Motor Forward Fast

100-0130 Exit Motor Forward Slow

100-0131 Exit Motor Backward

100-0132 Exit Motor Backward Slow

100-0140 Duplex Motor Forward

100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow

100-0160 Duplex Fan1 Run

100-0180 Dupelx Fan1 Run Ready

100-0200 T1 Elevating Motor




100-0240 Waste Toner Motor

100-0241 Waste Toner Led

100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor

100-0260 SMPS Fan Run

100-0270 SMPS Fan Run Ready

100-0340 Feed Motor

100-0370 Tray1 Pickup Motor

Meaning

Main BLDC Motor is On/Off

Detect if Main BLDC Motor runs at normal speed

Yellow Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off

Magenta Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off

Cyan Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off

Black Opc BLDC Motor is On/Off

Detect if Yellow OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed

Detect if Magenta OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed

Detect if Cyan OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed

Detect if Black OPC BLDC Motor runs at normal speed

T1 Engage Motor On/Off

Detect if the T1 Engage is On or Off.

Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off

Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off

Exit Motor Forward Backward On/Off

Exit Motor Forward Backward Slow On/Off

Duplex Motor Forward On/Off

Duplex Motor Forward Slow On/Off

Start/Stop Duplex Fan1 run

Detects if Duplex Fan1 runs at normal speed.

T1 Elevate Motor On/Off

T2 Elevate Motor On/Off (Optional)



Waste Toner Motor On/Off

Waste Toner Led On/Off

Detect if the waste toner is full or not.

Start/Stop Deve. Fan run

Detects if Deve Fan runs at normal speed.

Feed Motor is On/Off

Tray1 Motor is On/Off


4-24

4. Troubleshooting

Code Display




100-0430 Exit2 Motor Forward

100-0440 Exit2 Motor Backward

100-0450 ITB Motor

100-0460 Ready ITB

100-0470 DCF Feed Motor

101-0000 Bypass Feed Clutch

101-0050 Registration Clutch

101-0190 Out-Bin Full Sensor

101-0191 Out-Bin2 Full Sensor

101-0270 MP Clutch

101-0271 MP Solenoid

101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid

102-0000 Tray1 Home Position

102-0010 T1 Paper Empty Sensor

102-0041 T1 Paper Size Read

102-0050 T1 Stack Height Sensor













102-0280 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor

102-0290 Feed Sensor

102-0300 T2 Feed Sensor (or Door Open)



102-0352 DCF Feed Cover Open

102-0360 Regi. Sensor

102-0361 FuserOut Sensor

102-0371 Exit2 Sensor

4-25

Meaning




Exit2 Motor is On/Off

Exit2 Motor is On/Off

ITB Motor is On/Off

Detect if ITB Motor runs at normal speed

DCF Feed Motor is On/Off

Engages drive to pick up a paper from bypass Tray(MP

Tray).

Engages drive to registartion rolls.

Detect when a paper is at Out-Bin Full Sensor

Detect when a paper is at Out-Bin2 Full Sensor

MPClutch On/Off

MP Solenoid On/Off

Return Gate Solenoid On/Off

Detect when tray1 is closed.

Detect when paper is in Tray1.

Detects Paper Tray1 size.

Detects if paper in tray1 is elevated to the sensor.


Detect when paper is in tray2.











Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray(MP Tray).

Detect when a paper is at Feed sensor.

Detect when a paper is at T2 Feed sensor. (optional)



Detect DCF Cover is closed

Detect when a paper is at Regi. sensor.

Detect when a paper is at FuserOut sensor.

Detect when a paper is at Exit2 sensor.


Code Display

102-0380 Duplex Jam1 Sensor

104-0000 Waste Install Sensor

109-0020 Fuser Fan Run Ready

109-0030 Fuser Motor Forward

109-0031 Fuser Motor Backward

109-0034 Fuser Motor Ready

109-0040 Fuser Fan Run

109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor

110-0000 LSU Motor1 Run Ready

110-0060 LSU Motor1 Run

111-0000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow

111-0010 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta

111-0020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan

111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black

111-0040 Toner Sensor Yellow

111-0050 Toner Sensor Magenta

111-0060 Toner Sensor Cyan

111-0070 Toner Sensor Black

112-0010 Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Regi

113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor

113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor

113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor

113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor

113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor

113-0400 Finisher Media Height Sensor

113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor

113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor

113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor

113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor

113-0450 Finisher Stapler Selfpriming Sensor

113-0460 Finisher Ejector Home Sensor

113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor

113-0480 Finisher Stacker Height sensor

113-0490 Finisher Letter Size Sensor

113-0500 Finisher Transport Motor

113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor

113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor

113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor

113-0540 Finisher Media Height Solenoid

113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor


4. Troubleshooting

Meaning

Detect when a paper is at Duplex Jam1 sensor.

Detect if Waste is installed.

Detects if Fuser Fan Motor runs at normal speed.

Fuser Motor Forward On/Off

Fuser Motor Backward On/Off

Detect if Fuser Motor runs at each speed

Fuser Fan Motor On/Off

Detect if the fuser press is located Home position.

Detects if LSU motor1 runs at normal speed.

LSU Motor1 On/Off

Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off




TC sensor in developer tank.




Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Regi.

Detect when a paper is at Entrance Sensor

Detect when a paper is at Exit Sensor

Detect Paddle Home position

Detect Lift Tamper Home position

Detect Right Tamper Home position

Detect Main Tray level.

Detect Stapler Door Cover is closed

Detect Jam Door Cover is closed

Detect Stapler Home position

Detect Stapler level

Detect Stapler Selfpriming Sensor

Detect Ejector Home position

Detect Main Tray Home position

Detect Stacker Height sensor

Detect Paper Size

Finisher Transport Motor On/Off

Finisher Paddle Motor On/Off

Finisher Left Tamper Motor On/Off

Finisher Right Tamper Motor On/Off

Finisher Media Height Solenoid On/Off

Finisher Staple Unit Motor On/Off

4-26

4. Troubleshooting

Code Display

113-0560 Finisher Ejector Motor

113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor

113-0580 Finisher SCU Solenoid

113-0590 Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid

Meaning

Finisher Ejector Motor On/Off

Finisher Main Tray Motor On/Off

Finisher SCU Solenoid On/Off

Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid On/Off


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5.2. Fax Diagnostics

Fax NVM Read/Write

•

Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Read/Write

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To change a configuration value for fax firmware.

When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of configuration values that display along with description.

Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.

20-530

20-540

20-550

20-700

20-800

20-810

20-830

20-999

Code (Line 1)

20-200

20-210

20-220

20-300

20-310

20-320

20-400

20-410

20-420

20–500

20-520

Displayed Name

Pause Dial Time

Dial Pulse M/B ratio

Auto Dial Start Pause Time

Ring On Time

Ring Off Time

Ring Detection Freq

DTMF High-Freq Level

DTMF Low-Freq Level

DTMF Timing

Dial Mode

Error Rate

Dial Tone Detect

Loop Current Detect

Busy Signal Detect

Line Monitor Setting

Modem Speed

Fax Transmission Level

Auto Dial Timeout

Fax Line Setting

Default

1

0

8

11

5

1

170

560

1

2

7

12

55

0

0

0

0


4-28

4. Troubleshooting

Fax Test Routines

•

Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To perform test routines for the fax machine.

When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines that display along with description. Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.

After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.

Users can start/stop a desired test routine.

20-026

20-027

20-028

20-029

20-030

20-031

20-040

20-041

20-042

20-043

Code (Line 1)

20-012

20-014

20-015

20-016

20-020

20-021

20-022

20-023

20-024

20-025

Displayed Name

Single Tone 110 Hz

Single Tone 1650 Hz

Single Tone 1850 Hz

Single Tone 2100 Hz

DMTF # Line

DMTF * Line

DMTF 0 Line

DMTF 1 Line

DMTF 2 Line

DMTF 3 Line

DMTF 4 Line

DMTF 5 Line

DMTF 6 Line

DMTF 7 Line

DMTF 8 Line

DMTF 9 Line

V.21 300 bps

V.27ter 2400 bps

V.27ter 4800 bps

V.29 7200 bps

20-054

20-055

20-056

20-057

20-058

20-059

20-060

20-061

20-062

Code (Line 1)

20-044

20-045

20-046

20-047

20-048

20-049

20-050

20-051

20-052

20-053

Displayed Name

V.29 9600 bps

V.17 7200 bps

V.17 9600 bps

V.17 12000 bps

V.17 14400 bps

V.34 2400 bps

V.34 4800 bps

V.34 7200 bps

V.34 9600 bps

V.34 12000 bps

V.34 14400 bps

V.34 16800 bps

V.34 19200 bps

V.34 21600 bps

V.34 24000 bps

V.34 26400 bps

V.34 28800 bps

V.34 31200 bps

V.34 33600 bps


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5.3. Scanner Diagnostics

Shading Test

•

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To check quality of scanned images, especially defect in optical devices, including lens, mirror, lamp, and etc, are suspected.

Press "Share and Print report“ to see if the current shading value is correct.

Mono, red, green, blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report.

When the previous shading value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.

Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

•

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To read and/or write values in the scanner and DADF memory.

When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and saved values.

Users can also directly input a code to the text box to find a NVM.

After selecting a code, the “Edit” button will be enabled only if the code is writable.

If the selected code is writable and the “Edit” button is enabled, press the button to configure the desired value for the code.

Code

05-0000

05-0010

05-0020

NVM Description

Pick up Count

Document Duplex Reverse Point

Document Exit Turn Reverse Point

Meaning

Pick up Roller Life Count

Document Duplex Reverse Point

Document Exit Turn Reverse Point

Access

Read Only

Read/Write

Read/Write


4-30

4. Troubleshooting

Scanner/DADF Test Routines

•

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF Test Routines

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To perform test routines for the scanner and DADF.

When the main scanner/DADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines that display along with description.

Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.

After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.

Users can start/stop a desired test routine.

Code

05-0000

05-0001

05-0020

05-0040

05-0060

05-0070

05-0080

05-0210

05-0220

05-0230

05-0240

06-0000

06-0001

06-0010

06-0011

06-0020

06-0030

NVM Description

Document Length .1 Sensor


Document Width1 Sensor



Document Cover Open Sensor

Document Detect Sensor

Document Simplex Registration Sensor

Document Scan Read Sensor

Document Exit Sensor

Document Jig Test Low Speed Simplex

Document Jig Test Low Speed Duplex

Document Jig Test High Speed Simplex

Document Jig Test High Speed Duplex

Document Exit IDLE Sensor

Document Motor Forward

Document Motor Backward

Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 1


Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 1


Scanner Platen Motor Forward

Scanner Platen Motor Backward

Scanner home Sensor

Meaning






Document Cover Open Sensor

Document Detect Sensor

Document Simplex Registration Sensor

Document Scan Read Sensor

Document Exit Sensor

Document Jig Test Low Speed Simplex

Document Jig Test Low Speed Duplex

Document Jig Test High Speed Simplex

Document Jig Test High Speed Duplex

Document Exit IDLE Sensor

Document Motor Forward

Document Motor Backward





Scanner Platen Motor Forward

Scanner Platen Motor Backward

Scanner home Sensor

High/Low

Start/Stop

Start/Stop

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

Start/Stop

Start/Stop

High/Low

Access

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low

High/Low


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5.4. Adjustment

Print Adjustment

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct image position of print-outs automatically.

1) Press “Paper Supply” button and select a tray.

2) Press “Paper Size” button and select a paper size of the previously selected tray.

3) Press “Print” button. A test pattern will be printed out.

4) Press “Next” button. The system ask to locate the test pattern.

5) Locate the front side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass .

Verification

Specification

Reference

NOTE

DADF cannot be used.

6) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur .

7) Locate the back side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass again and press “OK” button once more.

8) The system will automatically calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the test pattern.

9) The new values are set to the system.

Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (a, b, e, f) in the image are located within the specified limit.

a, b, e, f : 10 mm, ± 1.5 mm

Scanner A/S Chart

■ Scanner A/S Chart

Front Side


Back Side

4-32

4. Troubleshooting

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct image position of print-outs manually.

1) Select a tray required adjustment.

2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while

“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.

E xa mple

Ca se s

Simple x

Le a ding

Edge

+ 15

Simple x

Side Edge

Duple x

Le a ding

Edge

Duple x

Side Edge

= 8.5 mm

= 11.6 mm

¡¡ = 8.0 mm

¢¢ = 13.0 mm

-16

+ 20

-30

Verification

Specification

Reference

Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (,,,) in the image are located within the specified limit.

a, b, e, f : 10 mm, ± 1.5 mm

Scanner A/S Chart

Copy Adjustment

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct image position of copied images manually.

1) Select a tray required adjustment.

2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while

“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.

E xa mple

Ca se s

Simple x

Le a ding

Edge

-15

Simple x

Side

Edge

Simple x

Le a ding

Edge

Simple x

Side

Edge

= 11.5 mm

= 8.4 mm

¡¡ = 12.0 mm

¢¢ = 7.0 mm

16

-20

+ 30

Verification

Specification

Reference

1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart . Scanning must be occur at the scanner glass .

2) Check if all the position of scale marks (a, b, e, f) in the image are located within the specified limit.

a, b, e, f : 10 mm ± 1.5 mm

Scanner A/S Chart


4. Troubleshooting

Scan Area Adjustment

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose

Operation Procedure

Verification

Specification

Reference

To correct image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.

1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scan glass . Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head to the left side of scan glass and to be placed face down. Also note that the Scanner A/S

Charts come in two sizes, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.

2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur, and the system will automatically calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .

3) The new value set to the table.

1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.

2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (a, b) of the chart to the copy.

3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy.

a, b : 10 ± 1.5 mm c : 190 ± 1.5 mm

A4 Scanner A/S Chart

A4 S ca n n e r A/ S Ch a rt


4-34

4. Troubleshooting

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct image position and magnification of scanned images manually. This function is used when a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.

1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.

• Image Position - Leading Edge

• Image Position - Side Edge

• Magnification - Vertical Direction

2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.

3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.

4) Image Position (a, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “+”.

Otherwise, press “-”.

5) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.

6) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.

E xa mple

Ca se s

= 11.0 mm

= 9.0 mm

= 191.7 mm

= 188.1 mm

Le a ding

Edge

-10

Side

Edge

+ 10

Ve rtica l Dire ction

Adjustme nt

+ 0.8% (-3.4mm)

-0.4% (ne a r + 1.8mm)

Verification

Specification

Reference

NOTE

The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +

10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.

1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.


3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy .

a, b : 10 ± 1.5 mm c : 190 ± 1.5 mm

Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6

Magnification Unit : %, Scale: 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max: 99/101



4. Troubleshooting

DADF Adjustment

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose

Operation Procedure

Verification

Specification

Reference

To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF automatically.

1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the DADF. Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head to feeding direction and to be placed face up. Also note that the Scanner A/S Charts come in two size, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.

2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur ,and the system will automatically calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .

3) The new values are set to the table.

1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.


3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy.

a, b : 10 ± 1.5 mm c : 190 ± 1.5 mm



4-36

4. Troubleshooting

•

Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF manually. This function is used when a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.

1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.

• Image Position - Simplex Leading Edge

• Image Position – Simplex Side Edge

• Magnification – Vertical Direction

2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.

3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.

4) Image Position (Simplex Leading Edge, a) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “+”. Otherwise, press “-”.

5) Image Position (Simplex Side Edge, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.

6) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.

7) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.

E xa mp le

Ca s e s

= 11.5 mm

= 8.8 mm

= 191.3 mm

= 188.0 mm

Le a d ing

Ed g e

-15

S id e

Ed g e

12

Ve rtic a l Dire c tio n

Ad jus tme nt

+0.6% (ne a r -2.6mm)

-0.5% (ne a r +2.0mm)

Verification

Specification

Reference

NOTE

The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +

10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.

1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.

2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (,) of the chart to the copy.

3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line of the chart to the copy.

a, b : 10 ± 1.5 mm c : 190 ± 1.5 mm

Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6

Magnification Unit : %, Scale : 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max : 99/101



4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5.5. ACS (Auto Color Sensing)

•

Diagnostics > ACS

Purpose

Operation Procedure

Verification

Specification

To set the color coverage ratio of auto color mode in copy function.

• Color Coverage Ratio : The ratio of color contents in the original document.

Change the level from 1 to 5.

•

•

Classifies a document as color, if color coverage of the document is higher than predefined level.

Level 1 has higher probability of classifying documents to color, while level 5 has lower probability.

Copy the ‘mono copied’ original with auto color mode and check if print out is monochrome.

L e ve l 1 Le ve l 2 Le ve l 3 Le ve l 4 Le ve l 5

Color

Cove ra ge

0.01%

0.05% 0.1% 0.25%

0.5%

Reference N/A


4-38

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.5.6. Image Management

Auto Color Registration

•

Diagnostics > Color Management > Auto Color Registration

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct color registration of the system when it shows color shift between the original and a copy.

1) Select “On” or “Off” for ACR execution.

• If you select “Off”, ACR will not execute.

• If you select “On”, ACR will execute as the determined conditions.

2) Change execution condition(s) of the Automatic Color Registration.

• Page Condition : The system executes ACR based on the count of printed pages since the last ACR execution.

• LSU Temperature : The system executes ACR when LSU temperature of the device increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR execution.

Verification

Specification

Reference

NOTE

• ACR execution occurs when one of the ACR option meets the condition.

Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Auto Color Registration.

D

e fa ult

Pa ge

Condition

LSU

Te mpe ra ture

500

3

Refer to 4.6.8. Incorrect color registration

Min. Va lue

200

1

Ma x. Va lue

5000

100

Manual Color Registration

•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Manual Color Registration

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct color registration of the system manually when it shows color shift between the original and a copy.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Adjust the offset value for each color.

X offset of Y in Left

X offset of M in Left

• X offset of C in Left

X offset of Y in Right

X offset of M in Right

X offset of C in Right

•

•

Y offset of Y in Center

Y offset of M in Center

Y offset of C in Center


Verification

Specification

Reference

NOTE

• Range : [-5 ~ 5]

• Unit : dot

• Default : 0

Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Manual Color Registration.

N/A

Incorrect Color Registration in the troubleshooting chapter

4. Troubleshooting


4-40

4. Troubleshooting

Auto Tone Adjustment Activation

•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.

Operation Procedure

Verification

Specification

Reference

Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure

1) Select “On” or “Off” for Normal TRC Control execution.

• If you select “Off”, Normal TRC Control will not execute.

• If you select “On”, Normal TRC Control will execute as the determined conditions.

2) Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.

• Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count of printed pages since the last execution.

• Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the system returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the configured value.

Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.

Pa ge Count

Time Le ft Alone

D

e fa ult

300

480

Min. Va lue

10

90

Ma x. Va lue

5000

900

Refer to 4.6.6 Light Image


4. Troubleshooting

•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full

Purpose

Operation Procedure

Verification

Specification

Reference

To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.

replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.

Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.

•

On : Full TRC Control Enable

•

Off : Full TRC Control Disenable


N/A



4-42

4. Troubleshooting

Auto Tone Adjustment

•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Normal

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.

Operation Procedure

Verification

Reference

Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure

Select “Execute” button.



•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full

Purpose

Operation Procedure

Verification

Reference

To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.

replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.

Select “Execute” button.



•

Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > CTD Sensor Cleaning

Purpose To solve the “CTD Sensor Failure” error.

Operation Procedure

NOTE

Refer to the troubleshooting for error “A3–2113”

1) Clean the ACR/CTD sensor.

2) Enter the SVC mode. Execute the CTD Sensor cleaning.


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.6. Service Functions

4.4.6.1. Main Memory Clear

•

Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. It can be used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. All the user configured values return to the default values.

To clear the main memory, users need to select the country of the system locates, and rebooting of the system is required.

4.4.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance

•

Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Device Configuration Data Clear

-

This function formats all device configuration data, for example, user profile, address book, and devices settings, on the hard disk.

•

Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Temporary and Spool Data Clear

-

This function formats all temporary and spool data saved on the hard disk.

•

Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > User Saved Data and Log Data Clear

-

This function formats all the user data, for example, box data, pending secure jobs, font, form, macro, data related applications, and job log, on the hard disk.

•

Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All Saved Data Clear

-

This function formats all the data that can be erased with 3 functions above. The function will NOT format the hard disk entirely.

•

Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Hard Disk Check

-

This function checks a bad sector in the hard disk. If a bad sector is found, the system will display an error message and send an email notification to the system administrator.

4.4.6.3. Count Setting of Large Page

•

Service Functions > Count Setting of Large Page

This function sets count of large page, such as A3 and ledger size, to 1 count or 2 count of the total count. For example, the total use of 100 A4 impressions and 100 A3 impressions will become 200 impressions if the configuration is set to “1 Count

Up” while the total will be 300 impression if the configuration is set to “2 Count Up”.

4.4.6.4. Toner Save

•

Service Functions > Toner Save

This function reduces the use of toner up to 30% and only applies to monochrome printing.


4-44

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.6.5. Port

•

Service Functions > Port

This function enables/disables remote connections to the system via telnet, OSGI command shell, and SMB(samba) protocol.

This function can be used when there is a problem that requires developers to access the system or when there is a need for developers to upload applications for a test.

Since enabling those ports can creates a risk of damaging data stored in the device, agreement of the administrator of the customer site is necessary. The user must log in as the administrator to enable/disable the services.

4.4.6.6. Debug Log

•

Service Functions > Debug Log

This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options.

-

Off : This option disables the logging option.

-

Job Status: This option only enables the logging option of user created jobs.

-

Details : This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. Note that this option might create a trade-off of performance in certain system operation. Use this option when the system behaves abnormally, and engineers need to investigate problems.

4.4.6.7. Capture Log

•

Service Functions > Capture Log

This function copies all the saved log in the system to a UBS memory as a zip file. Note that the size of system log could reach up to 1GB. If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.

1) Connect USB memory to device.

2) Enter service mode by pressing 1 + 2 + 3 buttons. Enter 1934 and OK.

3) Go to "

Service Functions > Debug Log

" and change debug log level to “DETAILS”.


4) Go to "

Service Functions > Capture Log

" and press Capture Log button.

4. Troubleshooting

5) Once it is completed, the message will be displayed. Then restore the debug log level to ”JOB STATUS”.

NOTE

If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.

6) Check is the Log file is created in the USB memory.


4-46

4. Troubleshooting

4.4.6.8. System Recovery

•

Service Functions > System Recovery

This function repairs or formats the HDD of the system. To use this function, a HDD image need to be saved in a USB memory, and that USB memory needs to be plugged in the system before the execution.

NOTE

• Memory stick file system type : FAT16 or FAT32 not NTFS

• Memory stick must contain the following 3 files only.

-

unix script files x 2

-

HDD image file x1

1) From the system recovery UI, Choose “SYS” to recover only the system partition of the HDD or “ALL” to recover all the partition of the HDD.

2) When the system recovery UI is appeared after reboot, choose “HDD Repair” to repair any corrupted data in the selected partition or choose “HDD Format” to format the data in the selected partition.

4-47 a) HDD Format

• Hidden Partition : This can format and reinstall the only System Binary in HDD. User data is not deleted.

• USB : This can format the HDD using USB stick. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.

• Network : This can format the HDD using network. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.

b) HDD Repair : This can restore the internal system by checking the HDD error. This is for HDD recovery itself and irrelevant to the user data in device.


4. Troubleshooting

3) When pushing “Next” button, the login page for authentication will be displayed. The password will be

1934

as the factory setting password.

4) When pushing “Next” button, the following page will be displayed.

• In case of selecting USB option :

The Next button is pressed after inserting the USB stick.

The system will check for the required packages in the USB stick. If all the packages are present in the USB stick then the system will be directed to the confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with an appropriate error message.

• In case of selecting Network option :


4-48

4. Troubleshooting

This page contains two sections :

-

Configure device IP address

a) Device IP: IP address for the device b) Gateway IP: Gateway IP address for the device c) Subnet Mask: Network Subnet Mask for the device

-

Configure samba settings

a) Server IP : IP address of the server.

b) User ID : user ID of the server to login into the server system c) Password : password of the server system d) Shared folder : name of the shared folder on the server, where the packages for the system recovery are present.

The Next button is pressed after providing the above information.

The system will establish the provided IP to the device and try to connect to the server and check for the available packages on the server.

If Network is establish and all the packages are present in the shared folder of the server then the system will be directed to the Confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with an appropriate error message.

5) When pushing “Next” button on option selection page, the confirmation page will be displayed.

6) When pushing “Next” button, progress page will be displayed.

7) When completing HDD Recovery or HDD Repair successfully, reboot the machine.


4. Troubleshooting

8) After rebooting, the machine will start the system initialization.

NOTE

If the system initialization is not executed, enter the svc mode and execute “Full memory clear”.

If not, the machine may not work normally.

9) Execute the firmware update using the one ROM FW file after system initialization. This work is a must for all FW module level.

4.4.6.9. TR Control Mode

•

Service Functions > TR Control Mode

Purpose

Operation Procedure

To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.

1) T1 Control Problems

• Choose the process speed (Full, Half, Lower) based on the type of paper to be used.

• Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.

• Gray Spot : Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color

• Non Cyclic White Line : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color

• OPC Cyclic Ghost : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color

Gr a y Sp o t N o n Cyc lic Wh it e Lin e

2) T2 Control Problems

• Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.

• Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.

• Blur : Increase T1 PWM value

• Poor Transfer : Increase T1 PWM value

• Re-transfer : Decrease T1 PWM value

• White Spot : Decrease T1 PWM value

O PC Cyc lic Gh o s t

Blu r

Verification


Po o r Tr a n s fe r

Print out a test job and make sure the transfer problem has resolved.

Wh it e Sp o t

4-50

4. Troubleshooting

Specification

Reference

N/A

N/A

4.4.6.10. User Data Management

•

Service Functions > User Data Management

This function backup or restore user data stored in the hard disk. The purpose of this function is to backup user data before format of the hard disk and store back to the hard disk after format. Note that hard disk format will be performed when the data encryption option is enabled by administrators.

NOTE

To use this function users need to prepare a USB hard disk that its size is larger than 100GB.


4. Troubleshooting

4.4.7. SFE (Special Feature Enablement)

Special Feature Enablement (SFE) means to provide the configurable options (On/Off) in service mode for technicians or dealers to satisfy the requirements from B2B sites easily without changing the firmware installed in a device.

SFE menu description

•

Service Mode > SFE > Letterhead/Preprinted paper handle (001)

If this option is enabled, in case of printing in directional media (Letterhead/Preprinted), the device prints as the same output direction regardless of simplex or duplex.

•

Service Mode > SFE > Mono Print only mode (002)

If this option is enabled, the device always prints output as mono about PC printing.

•

Service Mode > SFE > Copy Speed (004)

If this option is enabled, the device accelerates the scan speed of ADF copy by reducing scan resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi.

•

Service Mode > SFE > Print Output (005)

If this option is enabled, the device provides the same output direction about Flatbed printing and ADF printing.

NOTE

Refer to the following table for SFE supported in each model.

CLX-9201/

9251/ 9301

SFE Code Title

(Polaris

Color)

001

002

Letterhead/Preprinted paper handle

Mono Print only mode

O

O

004

005

Copy Speed

Print Output

O

O

SCX-8123/

8128

(Polaris

Mono)

O

X

O

O

CLX-9252/

9352

(Cosmos-R

Color)

O

O

O

X

SCX-8230/

8240

(Cosmos-R

Mono)

O

X

O

X

CLX-8640/

8650

(Evergreen)

O

O

X

X


4-52

4. Troubleshooting

4.5. Error Code and Troubleshooting

Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status or errors.

NOTE

Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models.

Error Code

A1-1111

A1-1113

A1-1211

A1-1213

A1-1611

A1-1612

A1-1613

A1-2211

A1-2212

A1-2213

A1-2311

A1-2312

A1-2313

A1-2411

A1-2412

A1-2413

A1-2511

A1-2512

A1-2513

A1-4310

Error Message

Motor Failure: #A1-1111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists




















4-53

Troubleshooting Page

Page 4–63

Page 4–63

Page 4–65

Page 4–65

Page 4–67

Page 4–67

Page 4–67

Page 4–69

Page 4–69

Page 4–69

Page 4–71

Page 4–71

Page 4–71

Page 4–73

Page 4–73

Page 4–73

Page 4–75

Page 4–75

Page 4–75

Page 4–77


Error Code

A1-5212

A1-5213

A1-5312

A1-5313

A1-5412

A1-5413

A1-5512

A1-5513

A2-1211

A2-1212

A2-1221

A2-1223

A2-1521

A2-1523

A2-2310

A2-2311

A2-2321

A2-2323

A2-2410

A3-2113

A3-3111

A3-3112

A3-3113

A3-3114

Error Message









Fan Failure: #A2-1211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists


Fan Failure: #A2-1221. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the problem persists









The CTD sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper

Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists





4. Troubleshooting


Page 4–79

Page 4–79

Page 4–80

Page 4–80

Page 4–81

Page 4–81

Page 4–82

Page 4–82

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–83

Page 4–85

Page 4–86

Page 4–86

Page 4–86

Page 4–86

4-54

4. Troubleshooting

C1-2411

C1-2413

C1-2510

C1-2512

C1-3110

C1-3120

C1-3130

C1-3140

C1-3311

C1-3411

C1-3413

C1-3512

C1-4110

C1-4120

C1-4130

C1-4140

C1-4311

A3-3412

A3-4114

C1-2110

C1-2120

C1-2130

C1-2140

C1-2311

Error Code

A3-3210

A3-3211

A3-3212

A3-3310

A3-3311

A3-3312

A3-3410

A3-3411

Error Message










The ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper

Prepare new yellow toner cartridge

Replace with new yellow toner cartridge.

End of life, Replace with new yellow toner cartridge


Yellow Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2311. Install yellow toner cartridge again

Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it

Shake yellow toner cartridge.

Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide

Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new magenta toner cartridge

Replace with new magenta toner cartridge

End of life, Replace with new magenta toner cartridge


Magenta Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-3311. Install magenta toner cartridge again

Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it

Shake magenta toner cartridge.

Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new cyan toner cartridge

Replace with new cyan toner cartridge

End of life, Replace with new cyan toner cartridge


Cyan Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-4311. Install cyan toner cartridge again


Page 4–87

Page 4–87

Page 4–87

Page 4–88

Page 4–88

Page 4–88

Page 4–88

Page 4–88

Page 4–88

Page 4–85

Page 4–89

Page 4–89

Page 4–89

Page 4–89

Page 4–90

Page 4–91

Page 4–91

Page 4–91

Page 4–91

Page 4–92

Page 4–92

Page 4–92

Page 4–92

Page 4–93

Page 4–94

Page 4–94

Page 4–94

Page 4–95

Page 4–95

Page 4–95

Page 4–95

Page 4–96


4. Troubleshooting

C3-3140

C3-3411

C3-3414

C3-3512

C3-4110

C3-4130

C3-4140

C3-4411

C3-4414

C3-2110

C3-2130

C3-2140

C3-2411

C3-2414

C3-2511

C3-2512

C3-3110

C3-3130

Error Code

C1-4411

C1-4413

C1-4512

C1-5110

C1-5120

C1-5130

C1-5140

C1-5311

C1-5411

C1-5413

C1-5512

C3-4512

C3-5110

C3-5130

C3-5140

C3-5411

C3-5414

C3-5512

C5-1110

C5-1120

C5-3120

C6-1120

Error Message

Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it

Shake cyan toner cartridge.

Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new black toner cartridge

Replace with new black toner cartridge

Replace with black new toner cartridge

End of life, Replace with new black toner cartridge

Black Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-5311. Install black toner cartridge again

Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

Shake black toner cartridge.

Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new yellow imaging unit

End of life, Replace with new yellow imaging unit


Yellow imaging unit is not installed. Install it

Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again

Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide

Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new magenta imaging unit

End of life, Replace with new magenta imaging unit


Magenta imaging unit is not installed. Install it

Magenta Imaging Unit Failure #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again

Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new cyan imaging unit

Replace with new cyan imaging unit

End of life, Replace with new cyan imaging unit

Cyan imaging unit is not installed. Install it

Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install imaging unit again

Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new black imaging unit

Replace with new black imaging unit

Replace with new black imaging unit

Black Imaging unit is not installed. Install it

Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install imaging unit again

Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide

Prepare new transfer belt unit

Replace new transfer belt unit

Replace with new Transfer roller.

Replace with new fuser unit


Page 4–97

Page 4–97

Page 4–97

Page 4–98

Page 4–98

Page 4–98

Page 4–98

Page 4–99

Page 4–100

Page 4–100

Page 4–100

Page 4–101

Page 4–101

Page 4–101

Page 4–102

Page 4–102

Page 4–102

Page 4–102

Page 4–103

Page 4–103

Page 4–103

Page 4–104

Page 4–104

Page 4–104

Page 4–105

Page 4–105

Page 4–105

Page 4–106

Page 4–106

Page 4–106

Page 4–107

Page 4–107

Page 4–107

Page 4–108

Page 4–108

Page 4–108

Page 4–109

Page 4–109

Page 4–110

Page 4–110


4-56

4. Troubleshooting

C8-5130

C8-5210

C8-5310

C8-5313

C9-2110

C9-2120

C9-2220

H1-1311

H1-1312

H1-1313

H1-1314

H1-1315

H1-1317

H1-1318

H1-1322

H1-1351

H1-1352

H1-1353

H1-1411

H1-1412

H1-1417

Error Code

C6-1310

C7-1110

C7-1130

C7-1311

C8-2130

C8-2210

C8-2310

C8-2313

C8-3130

C8-3210

C8-3310

C8-3313

C8-4130

C8-4210

C8-4310

C8-4313

Error Message

Fuser unit is not installed. Install it

Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one

Waste toner container is full. Replace it

Waste toner container is not installed. Install it

Replace with new yellow developer unit

Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on

Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again

Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

Replace with new magenta developer unit

Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on

Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again

Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

Replace with new cyan developer unit

Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on

Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again

Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

Replace with new black developer unit

Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on

Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again

Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

Prepare with new Transfer roller

Replace with new Transfer roller

TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again

Paper jam in Tray 3

Paper jam in Tray 3

Paper jam in Tray 3

Paper jam inside of machine

Paper jam in Tray 3

Paper jam in Tray 3

Paper jam in Tray 3

Tray 3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly

Paper is low in Tray 3. Load paper

Paper is empty in Tray 3. Load paper

Input System Failure: #H1-1353. Pull Tray 3 out and insert it

Paper jam in Tray 4

Paper jam in Tray 4

Paper jam in Tray 4

Page 4–116

Page 4–116

Page 4–116

Page 4–116

Page 4–117

Page 4–117

Page 4–118

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–119

Page 4–121

Page 4–122

Page 4–122

Page 4–123

Page 4–124

Page 4–124

Page 4–124


Page 4–111

Page 4–112

Page 4–112

Page 4–112

Page 4–113

Page 4–113

Page 4–113

Page 4–113

Page 4–114

Page 4–114

Page 4–114

Page 4–114

Page 4–115

Page 4–115

Page 4–115

Page 4–115


H2-6713

H2-6714

H2-6715

H2-6716

H2-6717

H2-6718

H2-6719

H2-6720

H2-6721

H2-6704

H2-6705

H2-6706

H2-6707

H2-6708

H2-6709

H2-6710

H2-6711

H2-6712

Error Code

H1-1418

H1-1422

H1-1451

H1-1452

H1-1453

H1-5323

H1-5330

H2-6700

H2-6701

H2-6702

H2-6703

H2-6722

H2-6723

H2-6724

H2-6725

H2-6726

H2-6727

H2-6728

H2-6729

H2-6730

H2-6731

H2-6732

Error Message

Paper jam in Tray 4


Paper is low in Tray 4. Load paper

Paper is empty in Tray 4. Load paper

Input System Failure: #H1-1453. Pull Tray 4 out and insert it

Tray door is open. Close the door

DCF Failure: #H1-5330. Check internal DCF connection

Paper jam in front of finisher

Paper jam inside of finisher



Paper jam at exit of finisher


Finisher Failure: #H2-6706. Check finisher




















Finisher Stapler door is open. Close it

Finisher Jam door is open. Close it





Staple cartridge is low. Replace it


4. Troubleshooting


Page 4–124

Page 4–126

Page 4–127

Page 4–127

Page 4–128

Page 4–129

Page 4–130

Page 4–131

Page 4–131

Page 4–131

Page 4–131

Page 4–131

Page 4–131

Page 4–132

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–133

Page 4–134

Page 4–134

Page 4–135

Page 4–135

Page 4–135

Page 4–135

Page 4–136

4-58

4. Troubleshooting

M1-4211

M1-5111

M1-5112

M1-5211

M1-5212

M2-1121

M2-1124

M2-1125

M2-1131

M2-1134

M2-1135

M2-1211

M2-1213

M2-1214

M2-1331

M2-1333

M2-1334

M2-2111

Error Code

H2-6733

H2-6734

H2-6735

H2-6736

H2-6737

H2-6738

H2-6739

H2-6740

H2-6741

H2-6742

H2-6743

H2-6744

H2-6A50

H2-6A63

M1-1113

M1-1213

M1-1610

M1-3122

M1-3222

M1-4111

Error Message

Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it


Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper









Staple Cartridge not install. Install it

Finisher Failure: #H2-6A50. Check finisher

Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it

Paper jam in tray 1

Paper jam in tray 2

Paper jam in MP Tray



Tray Failure: #M1-4111. Pull tray 1 out and insert it. Call for service if the problem persists

Tray Failure: #M1-4211. Pull tray 2 out and insert it. Call for service if the problem persists

Paper is low in tray 1. Load paper

Paper is empty in tray 1. Load paper

Paper is low in tray 2. Load paper

Paper is empty in tray 2. Load paper

Paper jam in tray 1

Paper jam in tray 1


Paper jam in tray 2

Paper jam in tray 2

Paper jam in tray 1


Paper Mismatch at tray. Load tray with setting paper, and remove the jammed paper



Check whether the pieces of paper remain in the paper path


Paper jam at the top of duplex path


Page 4–136

Page 4–137

Page 4–138

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–140

Page 4–142

Page 4–143

Page 4–143

Page 4–144

Page 4–146

Page 4–148

Page 4–150

Page 4–151

Page 4–152

Page 4–153

Page 4–154

Page 4–154

Page 4–155

Page 4–155

Page 4–144

Page 4–157

Page 4–157

Page 4–146

Page 4–158

Page 4–158

Page 4–159

Page 4–159

Page 4–159

Page 4–160

Page 4–160

Page 4–160

Page 4–160


Error Code

M2-2113

M2-2114

M3-1411

M3-1413

M3-1414

M3-2230

M3-2430

S1-1113

S1-1313

S1-2111

S1-2411

S1-2449

S1-2510

S1-2511

S1-2520

S1-2521

S1-2523

S1-2540

S1-3110

S1-4111

S1-4311

S2-1211

S2-2311

S2-3110

S2-3114

S1-2421

S1-2422

S1-2433

S1-2434

S1-2435

S1-2436

S1-2437

S1-2438

S1-2439

S1-2443

S1-2444

S1-2445

S1-2446

S1-2447

S1-2448

Error Message



Paper jam in exit area


Paper jam in exit area

Paper in output bin is full. Remove printed paper

Paper in output bin is full. Remove printed paper

Video System Failure: #S1-1113. Turn off then on

The clock became initial time. Set a time again


HDD System Failure: #S1-2411. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

HDD System Failure: #S1-2421. Turn off then on

HDD System Failure: #S1-2422. Turn off then on

System Failure: #S1-2433 . Call for service

HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide






HDD System Failure #S1-2443 : Call for service







MSOK System Failure: #S1-2510. Turn off then on

MSOK System Failure: #S1-2511. Turn off then on

MSOK Failure: #S1-2520. Call for service.

MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service

PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK

MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK




Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on





4. Troubleshooting


Page 4–160

Page 4–160

Page 4–161

Page 4–162

Page 4–162

Page 4–163

Page 4–163

Page 4–164

Page 4–165

Page 4–166

Page 4–167

Page 4–168

Page 4–170

Page 4–170

Page 4–170

Page 4–170

Page 4–170

Page 4–170

Page 4–171

Page 4–171

Page 4–172

Page 4–174

Page 4–174

Page 4–174

Page 4–174

Page 4–167

Page 4–167

Page 4–168

Page 4–169

Page 4–169

Page 4–169

Page 4–169

Page 4–169

Page 4–169

Page 4–168

Page 4–168

Page 4–168

Page 4–168

Page 4–168

Page 4–168

4-60

4. Troubleshooting

S6-322A

S7-1110

S7-2110

U1-2113

U1-2115

U1-2119

U1-2132

U1-2135

U1-2141

U1-2142

U1-2316

S2-5164

S2-5210

S2-5240

S3-3121

S3-3211

S4-3111

S5-3111

S6-3122

S6-3123

S6-3128

S6-3224

S6-3225

S6-3226

S6-3227

Error Code

S2-4210

S2-4410

S2-5111

S2-5112

S2-5120

S2-5131

S2-5132

S2-5133

S2-5135

S2-5136

S2-5161

S6-3229

Error Message

Front door is open. Close it

Right door is open. Close it

Failed to adjust the color registration










Failed to adjust the OPC Feedforward control

Failed to adjust the OPC Feedforward control

Scanner is locked

Scan System Failure: #S3-3211. Turn off then on

Fax System Failure: #S4-3111. Install fax modem card again

UI System Failure: #S5-3111. Call for service

Network cable is disconnected. Check it

This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it

802.1x authentication failed. Please contact the system administrator

BOOTP error in wireless LAN. Switching to Auto IP

BOOTP error in wireless LAN. Reconfigure DHCP or static IP

DHCP error in wireless LAN. Switching to Auto IP

DHCP error in wireless LAN. Reconfigure BOOTP or static IP

The IPv4 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it

The IPv6 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it


Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on

Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113. Turn off then on

Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists


Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2132. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists




Fuser Failure: #U1-2316. Turn off then on

4-61


Page 4–175

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–176

Page 4–177

Page 4–178

Page 4–179

Page 4–180

Page 4–181

Page 4–182

Page 4–182

Page 4–183

Page 4–183

Page 4–183

Page 4–183

Page 4–182

Page 4–182

Page 4–183

Page 4–183

Page 4–184

Page 4–186

Page 4–184

Page 4–187

Page 4–187

Page 4–189

Page 4–189

Page 4–190


U2-6143

U3-3211

U3-3213

U3-3214

U3-3311

U3-3313

U3-3314

U3-3413

U3-3414

U3-3513

U3-3514

U3-3611

U3-3613

U3-3614

U3-3713

U3-4210

Error Code

U1-2317

U1-2335

U1-2337

U1-233A

U1-233D

U2-6121

U2-6122

U2-6123

U2-6142

Error Message




Fuser Failure: #U1-233A. Turn off then on

Fuser Failure: #U1-233D. Turn off then on

LSU Failure: #U2-6121. Please turn off then on

LSU Failure: #U2-6122. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

LSU Failure: #U2-6123. Please turn off then on



Original paper jam inside of scanner

Original paper jam inside the scanner









Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner




Top door of scanner is open

4. Troubleshooting


Page 4–190

Page 4–192

Page 4–194

Page 4–192

Page 4–194

Page 4–196

Page 4–196

Page 4–196

Page 4–198

Page 4–198

Page 4–199

Page 4–199

Page 4–199

Page 4–199

Page 4–199

Page 4–199

Page 4–200

Page 4–200

Page 4–201

Page 4–201

Page 4–202

Page 4–202

Page 4–202

Page 4–202

Page 4–203


4-62

4. Troubleshooting

4.5.1. Ax-xxxx type error code

► Error Code

A1–1111

A1–1113

► Error message

Motor Failure: #A1-1111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.


► Symptom

Regi/MP motor operation is abnormal.

► Troubleshooting method

• A1–1111 : Regi/MP motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–1113 : Regi/MP motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".

1) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, turn the machine off again.

2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around Regi./MP unit.

3) Remove the rear cover after removing 10 screws.

4) Check if the Regi/MP motor connector is connected correctly.

4-63

5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select motor test.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 100–0000)

Check the motor operation.

a) If the motor is not operational,


• Check the signal and power with the DVM.

4. Troubleshooting

• If the checked result is normal, replace the motor(

JC31-00123B

).

• If the checked result is abnormal, check the following.

If 24V power is not generated, replace the SMPS board (

JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-

If the control signal is abnormal, replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).

b) If the motor is operational,

• Check the Pin Num 8. If the value is abnormal, replace the main board. If the value is normal, replace the harness.


4-64

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–1211

A1–1213




► Symptom

Fuser motor operation is abnormal.


• A1–1211 : Fuser motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–1213 : Fuser motor is operating but recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around fuser unit.


4) Check if the fuser motor connector is connected correctly.

4-65







4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-


JC92–02429A

).




4-66

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–1611

A1–1612

A1–1613





► Symptom

ITB motor operation is abnormal


• A1–1611 : ITB motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–1612 : ITB motor is not operated for print-job.

• A1–1613 : ITB motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Remove the ITB unit

(

Refer to 3.2.2.4 ITB Unit in chapter 3

)


4) Check if the ITB motor connector is connected correctly.

4-67







4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).


-


JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).


JC92–02429A

).




4-68

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–2211

A1–2212

A1–2213





► Symptom

Yellow OPC motor operation is abnormal.


• A1–2211 : Yellow OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–2212 : Yellow OPC motor is not operated for print-job.

• A1–2213 : Yellow OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around yellow drum drive unit.


4) Check if the yellow OPC motor connector is connected correctly.

4-69

5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the yellow OPC motor test.






4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-


JC92–02429A

).




4-70

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–2311

A1–2312

A1–2313





► Symptom

Magenta OPC motor operation is abnormal.


• A1–2311 : Magenta OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–2312 : Magenta OPC motor is not operated for print-job.

• A1–2313 : Magenta OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around magenta drum drive unit.


4) Check if the magenta OPC motor connector is connected correctly.

4-71

5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the magenta OPC motor test.






4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-


JC92–02429A

).




4-72

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–2411

A1–2412

A1–2413





► Symptom

Cyan OPC motor operation is abnormal.


• A1–2411 : Cyan OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–2412 : Cyan OPC motor is not operated for print-job.

• A1–2413 : Cyan OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around cyan drum drive unit.


4) Check if the cyan OPC motor connector is connected correctly.

4-73

5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the cyan OPC motor test.






4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-


JC92–02429A

).




4-74

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–2511

A1–2512

A1–2513





► Symptom

Black OPC motor operation is abnormal.


• A1–2511 : Black OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.

• A1–2512 : Black OPC motor is not operated for print-job.

• A1–2513 : Black OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".


2) Open the side cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around black drum drive unit.


4) Check if the black OPC motor connector is connected correctly.

4-75

5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select the black OPC motor test.






4. Troubleshooting


JC31-00123B

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A (110V)

).

-


JC92–02429A

).




4-76

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–4310



► Symptom

The contact of ITB Unit is abnormal. / The resistance value of the first transfer roller is abnormal.


1) Enter SVC mode. Select the T1 engage motor test. (

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >

100–0080

)

Push the start button and check the motor operation.

2) If the motor is not operational, a) Open the side cover. Check if the ITB connector is connected correctly or is deformed.

b) If the harness is defective, replace it.

c) Remove the ITB unit from the machine. Check if the photo interrupter sensor is contaminated or assembled properly.

d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it.

e) If the motor is operational but the engage gear is not operational, replace the main drive unit(

JC93-00723A

).

4-77

3) If there is a motor noise or the motor is not operational normally, check the following : a) Remove the rear cover. Check if the T1 engage motor in the main drive unit is defective.

i) Rotate the motor manually.


4. Troubleshooting

• If the motor operation is stiff, replace the motor(

JC93-00452A

).

ii) Measure the resistance value with DVM.

• If the measured value is out of the standard area (7~10 ohm), replace the motor(

JC93-00452A

).

b) If the motor is normal, measure the motor signal with DVM.

• If the phase output voltage is changed in 0~24V(8~10V), the output value is normal.

• If the phase output voltage is not changed to 0 or 24V, replace the main board(

JC92-02429A

).


4-78

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–5212

A1–5213




► Symptom

Yellow toner is not supplied normally.


• A1–5212 : Toner supply is stopped during operation.

• A1–5213 : Toner is not supplied.

1) Open the front cover. If the yellow toner pipe is blocked, open it.

2) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, check the following steps.

3) Enter SVC mode. Select the yellow toner supply motor test.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines)

• 111-0010 : Toner Dispense Motor Yellow

4) If the motor is not operational, measure the yellow motor power with DVM.

a) If 24V power is generated, replace the yellow toner supply motor(

JC93-00446A

).

b) If 24V power is not generated,

• Measure the 24V power on the SMPS board. If the SMPS board(

JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A

(110V)

) is defective, replace it.

4-79

• If the SMPS board is normal, replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).


► Error Code

A1–5312

A1–5313




► Symptom

Magenta toner is not supplied normally.




1) Open the front cover. If the magenta toner pipe is blocked, open it.

4. Troubleshooting


3) Enter SVC mode. Select the magenta toner supply motor test.


• 111-0020 : Toner Dispense Motor Magenta

4) If the motor is not operational, measure the magenta motor power with DVM.

a) If 24V power is generated, replace the magenta toner supply motor(

JC93-00446A

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A

(110V)



JC92–02429A

).


4-80

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A1–5412

A1–5413




► Symptom

Cyan toner is not supplied normally.




1) Open the front cover. If the cyan toner pipe is blocked, open it.


3) Enter SVC mode. Select the cyan toner supply motor test.


• 111-0030 : Toner Dispense Motor Cyan

4) If the motor is not operational, measure the cyan motor power with DVM.

a) If 24V power is generated, replace the cyan toner supply motor(

JC93-00446A

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A

(110V)


4-81


JC92–02429A

).


► Error Code

A1–5512

A1–5513




► Symptom

Black toner is not supplied normally.




1) Open the front cover. If the black toner pipe is blocked, open it.

4. Troubleshooting


3) Enter SVC mode. Select the black toner supply motor test.


• 111-0040 : Toner Dispense Motor Black

4) If the motor is not operational, measure the black motor power with DVM.

a) If 24V power is generated, replace the black toner supply motor(

JC93-00446A

).



JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A

(110V)



JC92–02429A

).


4-82

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223

A2–1521 / A2–1523

A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323

A2–2410


Fan Failure: #A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

Fan Failure: #A2–1521 / A2–1523. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

Fan Failure: #A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

Fan Failure: #A2–2410. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists

► Symptom

SMPS or Fuser or Duplex or LSI fan is not operational.


NOTE

• SMPS fan error : A2–1211 / A2–1212 / A2–1221 / A2–1223

• Duplex fan error : A2–1521 / A2–1523

• Fuser fan error : A2–2310 / A2–2311 / A2–2321 / A2–2323

• LSU fan error : A2–2410

1) Turn the machine off.

2) Remove the rear cover.

(

Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover in chapter 3

)

3) Check if the corresponding fan connector is connected correctly.

4-83

4) If the connection is OK, Enter SVC mode and execute fan test.


• 100-0260 : SMPS Fan Run

• 109-0040 : Fuser Fan Run


4. Troubleshooting

5) If the fan is not operational, measure the fan power. (Red line) a) If 24V power is generated, replace the defective fan.

• Fuser Fan : JC31–00161A

• SMPS Fan : JC31–00160B b) If 24V power is not generated,


JC44-00100A (220V) / JC44-00093A

(110V)



JC92–02429A

).

6) If the fan operation is normal but the error persists, a) Check the yellow line signal with DVM. (Refer to the image in step 5) b) Check fan operation as connected or disconnected.

• If the Lock signal is 0V continually, check the harness. If the harness is OK, replace the main board.

• If the signal value is different from the table above, replace the fan.


4-84

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A3–2113 / A3–4114


The CTD/ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper.

► Symptom

CTD/ACR sensor window is contaminated.


1) Open the side cover.

2) Clean the sensor window [A] with a soft cloth.

3) Close the side cover.

4) Enter SVC mode. Select the “CTD Sensor Cleaning”

(

Diagnostics Image Management > Auto Color Tone Adjustment Condition > CTD Sensor Cleaning

)

5) When pop up appears, select the “Yes” button.

4-85

NOTE

a)

CTD sensor calibration will start. Then “CTD sensor failure” error will be solved b) If you don’t execute the CTD sensor cleaning in SVC mode, error message persists.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A3–3111

A3–3112

A3–3113

A3–3114






► Symptom

The NC sensor in the fuser unit is defective. / The sensor signal is abnormal due to a defective harness.


• A3–3111 : Center NC sensor is in short status.

• A3–3112 : Center NC sensor is in open status.

• A3–3113 : Side NC sensor is in short status.

• A3–3114 : Side NC sensor is in open status.

1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation. (

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics >

Engine Test Routines

)

• 109-0000 : Fuser Temperature A

• 109-0010 : Fuser Temperature B

2) Remove and disassemble the fuser unit.

(

Refer to 3.3.23 Fuser Unit

)

3) Measure the resistance value of the thermistor (

1404-001453

). If the measured value is out of 307KΩ~430KΩ

@25

℃

, replace the thermistor.

4) Install the fuser unit after replacing the thermistor.

5) If the error persists, replace the fuser unit (

JC91-01063A(220V) / JC91–01064A (110V)

).

6) If the error persists after replacing fuser unit, replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).


4-86

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A3–3210

A3–3211

A3–3212





► Symptom

Inner temperature sensor is defective.


• A3–3210 : Inner temperature sensor value is abnormal.

• A3–3211 : Inner temperature sensor is in short status.

• A3–3212 : Inner temperature sensor is in open status.

1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation.(

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine

Test Routines > 109-0012 Inner Temperature

)

2) Open the side cover. Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends.

• If the values is not in 10KΩ ± 1% (@ 25

℃

), replace the photo sensor (

1404-001417

).

4-87

3) If the sensor is normal, replace the main board(

JC92-02429A

).


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

A3–3310

A3–3311

A3–3312

A3–3410

A3–3411

A3–3412








► Symptom

Outer temperature/humidity sensor is defective.


• A3–3310 / A3–3311 / A3–3312 : Temperature function is abnormal.

• A3–3410 / A3–3411 / A3–3412 : Humidity function is abnormal.

1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation. (

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine

Test Routines > 109-0013 Outer Temperature

)

2) Remove the left cover.

(

Refer to 3.3.4 Temperature Sensor

)

Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends.

If the value is not in 47.5KΩ ~ 52.5KΩ (@ 25

℃

), replace the sensor(

JC93-00486A

).

3) If the harness and sensor are normal, replace the main board (

JC92-02429A

).


4-88

4. Troubleshooting

4.5.2. Cx-xxxx type error code

► Error Code

C1–2110


Prepare new yellow toner cartridge.

► Symptom

Yellow toner is almost empty.


1) Order new yellow toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C1–2120

C1–2130

C1–2140


Replace with new yellow toner cartridge


► Symptom

The yellow toner cartridge is at the end of its life.


1) Open the front cover.

2) Remove the yellow toner cartridge.

3) Install the new yellow toner cartridge (

CLT-Y809S

)

4) Close the front cover.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–2311


Yellow Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2311. Install yellow toner cartridge again

► Symptom

Yellow toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.



2) Remove the yellow toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

3) Check if the toner supply pipe is blocked. If it is closed, open it.



4-90

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–2411

C1–2413


Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

Shake yellow toner cartridge.

► Symptom

The yellow toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.


1) Open the front cover. Check if the yellow toner cartridge is installed.

2) Remove and reinstall the yellow toner cartridge.

3) If the problem persists, check if the toner cartridge modular jack is contaminated or deformed.

4) Replace the yellow toner cartridge(

CLT-Y809S

) with a new one.

► Error Code

C1–2510 / C1–2512


Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.

► Symptom

Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible.


1) Replace the yellow toner cartridge with a new one.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–3110


Prepare new magenta toner cartridge.

► Symptom

Magenta toner is almost empty.


1) Order new magenta toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C1–3120

C1–3130

C1–3140


Replace with new magenta toner cartridge


► Symptom

The magenta toner cartridge is at the end of its life.



2) Remove the magenta toner cartridge.

3) Install the new magenta toner cartridge (

CLT-M809S

)



4-92

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–3311


Magenta Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-3311. Install magenta toner cartridge again

► Symptom

Magenta toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.



2) Remove the magenta toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.




► Error Code

C1–3411

C1–3413


Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

Shake magenta toner cartridge.

► Symptom

The magenta toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.


1) Open the front cover. Check if the magenta toner cartridge is installed.

2) Remove and reinstall the magenta toner cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting


4) Replace the magenta toner cartridge(

CLT-M809S

) with a new one.

► Error Code

C1–3512


Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.

► Symptom

Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible.


1) Replace the magenta toner cartridge with a new one.


4-94

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–4110


Prepare new cyan toner cartridge.

► Symptom

Cyan toner is almost empty.


1) Order new cyan toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C1–4120

C1–4130

C1–4140


Replace with new cyan toner cartridge


► Symptom

The cyan toner cartridge is at the end of its life.



2) Remove the cyan toner cartridge.

3) Install the new cyan toner cartridge (

CLT-C809S

)



4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–4311


Cyan Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-4311. Install yellow toner cartridge again

► Symptom

Cyan toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.



2) Remove the cyan toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.




4-96

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–4411

C1–4413


Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

Shake cyan toner cartridge.

► Symptom

The cyan toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.


1) Open the front cover. Check if the cyan toner cartridge is installed.

2) Remove and reinstall the cyan toner cartridge.


4) Replace the cyan toner cartridge(

CLT-C809S

) with a new one.

► Error Code

C1–4512


Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.

► Symptom

Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible.


1) Replace the cyan toner cartridge with a new one.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–5110


Prepare new black toner cartridge.

► Symptom

Black toner is almost empty.


1) Order new black toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C1–5120

C1–5130

C1–5140


Replace with new black toner cartridge

End of life, Replace with new black toner cartridge

► Symptom

The black toner cartridge is at the end of its life.



2) Remove the black toner cartridge.

3) Install the new black toner cartridge (

CLT-K809S

)



4-98

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C1–5311


Black Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-5311. Install black toner cartridge again

► Symptom

Black toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.



2) Remove the black toner cartridge. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.




► Error Code

C1–5411

C1–5413


Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

Shake black toner cartridge.

► Symptom

The black toner cartridge is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected.


1) Open the front cover. Check if the black toner cartridge is installed.

2) Remove and reinstall the black toner cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting


4) Replace the black toner cartridge(

CLT-K809S

) with a new one.

► Error Code

C1–5512


Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.

► Symptom

Black toner cartridge is not compatible.


1) Replace the black toner cartridge with a new one.


4-100

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–2110


Prepare new yellow imaging unit

► Symptom

Yellow drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.


1) Order new yellow drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C3–2130

C3–2140



► Symptom

Yellow drum unit is at the end of its life.



2) Remove the waste toner container.

3) Remove the yellow drum unit.

(

Refer to 3.2.2.1. Drum Unit

)

4) Install the new yellow drum unit(

CLT-R809

).

5) Clean the LSU window.

(

Refer to 3.2.1.2. Cleaning the LSU window

)

6) Install the waste toner container.



4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–2411

C3–2414


Yellow imaging unit is not installed. Install it.

Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again

► Symptom

The yellow drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance of the imaging unit.




3) Remove and reinstall the yellow drum unit

(


)



► Error Code

C3–2511 / C3–2512


Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide

► Symptom

Yellow drum unit is not compatible.




3) Remove the yellow drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.

4) If the drum unit is not a samsung genuine, replace it with a new one.


4-102

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–3110


Prepare new magenta imaging unit

► Symptom

Magenta drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.


1) Order new magenta drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C3–3130

C3–3140



► Symptom

Magenta drum unit is at the end of its life.




3) Remove the magenta drum unit.

(


)

4) Install the new magenta drum unit(

CLT-R809

).


(


)




4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–3411

C3–3414


Magenta imaging unit is not installed. Install it.

Magenta Imaging Unit Failure #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again.

► Symptom

The magenta drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance of the imaging unit.




3) Remove and reinstall the magenta drum unit

(


)



► Error Code

C3–3512


Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide

► Symptom

Magenta drum unit is not compatible.




3) Remove the magenta drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.



4-104

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–4110



► Symptom

Cyan drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.


1) Order new cyan drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C3–4130

C3–4140



► Symptom

Cyan drum unit is at the end of its life.




3) Remove the cyan drum unit.

(


)

4) Install the new cyan drum unit(

CLT-R809

).


(


)




4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–4411

C3–4414


Cyan imaging unit is not installed. Install it.

Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install imaging unit again.

► Symptom

The cyan drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected./ The machine can’t read the charger resistance of the imaging unit.




3) Remove and reinstall the magenta drum unit

(


)



► Error Code

C3–4512


Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide

► Symptom

Cyan drum unit is not compatible.




3) Remove the cyan drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.



4-106

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–5110



► Symptom

Cyan drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.


1) Order new cyan drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.

► Error Code

C3–5130

C3–5140



► Symptom

Cyan drum unit is at the end of its life.




3) Remove the cyan drum unit.

(


)

4) Install the new cyan drum unit(

CLT-R809

).


(


)




4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C3–5411

C3–5414


Black imaging unit is not installed. Install it.

Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install imaging unit again.

► Symptom

The black drum unit is not installed. / The CRUM data is not detected. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance of the imaging unit.




3) Remove and reinstall the black drum unit

(


)



► Error Code

C3–5512


Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide

► Symptom

Black drum unit is not compatible.




3) Remove the black drum unit. Check if the drum unit is compatible with the machine.



4-108

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C5–1110

C5–1120


Prepare new transfer belt unit.

Replace new transfer belt unit.

► Symptom

The life of the ITB Unit expires soon or has expired.



2) Replace the ITB Unit (

JC96-06660A

).

(

Refer to 3.2.2.3. ITB Cleaner and 3.2.2.4. ITB Unit

)

3) Turn the machine on.

4) Enter SVC mode.

• To enter SVC mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter

“1934” and press the “OK” button.

5) Select “TRANSFER”

(

INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > TRANSFER

)

6) Select “ITB Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the ITB count.

7) Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C5–3120



► Symptom

The life of the transfer roller has expired.



2) Replace the Transfer roller(

JC95-01514A

).

(

Refer to 3.2.2.6. Transfer roller

)


4) Enter SVC mode.

• To enter SVC mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter

“1934” and press the “OK” button.


(


)

6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 Roller count.

7) Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.

► Error Code

C6–1120


Replace with new fuser unit

► Symptom

The life of the fuser unit has expired.



2) Replace the fuser unit(

JC91-01063A (220V) /JC91-01064A (110V)

).

(

Refer to 3.2.2.5. Fuser unit

)



4-110

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C6–1310


Fuser unit is not installed. Install it.

► Symptom

The fuser unit is not installed or fuser unit connector is not connected properly.


1) Turn the machine off then on.

2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off again.

3) Open the side cover. Check if the fuser unit is installed. If not, install the fuser unit.

4) If the fuser unit is installed, remove it.

(

Refer to 3.2.2.5. Fuser unit

)

5) Check if the fuser draw connector (

JC39–01677A

) is broken or defective.

6) Install the fuser unit.

7) If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit(

JC91–01063A(220V) / JC91–01064A(110V

).

CAUTION

The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fuser unit. When replacing it, you may get burned. Before replacing it, make sure that fuser unit has cooled.


► Error Code

C7–1110

C7–1130


Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one.

Waste toner container is full. Replace it.

► Symptom

The life of the waste toner container expires soon or has expired.



2) Remove the waste toner container(

CLT-W809

). Install a new waste toner container.


► Error Code

C7–1311


Waste toner container is not installed. Install it.

► Symptom

The waste toner container is not installed.



2) Remove and reinstall the waste toner container.


4. Troubleshooting


4-112

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C8–2130


Replace with new yellow developer unit

► Symptom

The life of the yellow developer unit expires has expired.



2) Replace the yellow developer unit.

(

Refer to 3.2.2.2. Developer Unit

)

3) Turn the machine on then print the test page.

► Error Code

C8–2210

C8–2310

C8–2313


Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on

Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again

Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

► Symptom

The yellow developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.





4-113

4) Install the waste toner container. Close the front cover.


6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the yellow developer unit.

7) If the problem persists, replace the yellow developer unit.

(


)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C8–3130


Replace with new magenta developer unit

► Symptom

The life of the magenta developer unit expires has expired.



2) Replace the magenta developer unit.

(


)


► Error Code

C8–3210

C8–3310

C8–3313


Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on

Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again

Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

► Symptom

The magenta developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.







6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the magenta developer unit.

7) If the problem persists, replace the magenta developer unit.

(


)


4-114

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C8–4130


Replace with new cyan developer unit

► Symptom

The life of the cyan developer unit expires has expired.



2) Replace the cyan developer unit.

(


)


► Error Code

C8–4210

C8–4310

C8–4313


Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on

Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again

Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

► Symptom

The cyan developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.





4-115



6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the cyan developer unit.

7) If the problem persists, replace the cyan developer unit.

(


)


► Error Code

C8–5130


Replace with new black developer unit

► Symptom

The life of the black developer unit expires has expired.



2) Replace the black developer unit.

(


)


► Error Code

C8–5210

C8–5310

C8–5313


Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on

Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again

Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists

► Symptom

The black developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.





4. Troubleshooting



6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the black developer unit.

7) If the problem persists, replace the black developer unit.

(


)


4-116

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

C9–2110

C9–2120



► Symptom

The life of the second transfer roller(T2) expires soon or has expired.



2) Replace the second transfer roller(

JC95-01514A

) with a new one.

(


)


4) Enter SVC mode.

• To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934” and press the “OK” button.


(


)

6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 Roller count.

7) Exit the SVC mode by pushing the home button.


► Error Code

C9–2220

C9–2120


TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again

► Symptom

The life of the second transfer roller(T2) is not installed.



2) Remove and reinstall the second transfer roller.

(


)


4) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS board(

JC44–00212A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.3. HVPS board

)

4. Troubleshooting


4-118

4. Troubleshooting

4.5.3. H1-xxxx type (DCF) error code

► Error Code

H1-1311

H1-1312

H1-1313

H1-1314

H1-1315

H1-1317

H1-1318


Paper jam in Tray 3.

► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred in tray3. (Pick up unit connection is defective. / Pickup rollers are defective. / Feed sensor is defective.)


1) Open the DCF Take Away-Cover. Remove the jammed paper.

2) Remove tray3. Remove the jammed paper. Close the DCF Take Away-Cover and insert tray3.

3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers below.

a) Remove the tray3 and tray4.

b) Check if the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are assembled correctly.

4-119 c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(

JC93-00540A

).

4) If pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers have no problem, check the following.

a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1. Check if the feed sensor cable is connected correctly.

b) Check if the sensor cable on DCF board is connected correctly.


c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(

0604-001381

).

d) Install the DCF pick up unit1.

5) If the problem persists after checking step 3~4, check the following : a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1. Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.

b) When pushing the pickup lever, check if the pick up rollers are down.

c) Replace the DCF pick up unit1(

JC93-00513A

) or defective part.

6) Check the DCF feed motor.

a) Check if the DCF feed motor cable is connected correctly.

b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF feed drive unit(

JC93-00447A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.2 DCF Feed Motor

)

7) Check the DCF pick up motor.

a) Check if the DCF pick up motor cable is connected correctly.

b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF pick up drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.3 DCF Pick Up Motor

)

4. Troubleshooting


4-120

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1-1322


Tray 3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly.

► Symptom

Tray 3 is pulled out or the auto size sensor connector is not connected or broken.


1) Remove and insert tray3 correctly.

2) If the problem persists, remove tray3 and tray4. Look inside machine.

3) Check if the auto size sensor cable is connected correctly. Unplug and reconnect it.

4) If the connection is OK, replace the auto size sensor(

JC93-00018A

).

5) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board(

JC92-02453A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.1. DCF Main Board

)


► Error Code

H1-1351

H1-1352


Paper is low in Tray 3. Load paper.

Paper is empty in Tray 3. Load paper.

► Symptom

Paper in the tray is less than 10% of specification. / The photo sensor is defective.


1) Remove tray3. Load the paper in tray3.

2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following.

a) Remove the DCF pick up unit1.

b) Check if the photo sensor in the DCF pick up unit1 is contaminated. If so, clean it.

c) If the photo sensor(

0604-001393


d) If the actuator(

JC66-03199A


4. Troubleshooting


4-122

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1-1353


Input System Failure #H1-1353 : Pull Tray 3 out and insert it.

► Symptom

The paper is not fed from tray3.




3) If the problem persists, turn the machine off.

4) Remove the Bracket Rear Cover after removing 6 screws.

4-123

5) Check if the connection between the DCF pick up drive and DCF board is correct.

6) If the connection is OK, replace the pick up drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor

)

7) If the problem persists, check the following.


b) Check if the photo sensor in the DCF pick up unit1 is contaminated, clean it.


0604-001393



4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1-1411

H1-1412

H1-1417

H1-1418



► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred in tray4. (Pick up unit connection is defective. / Pickup rollers are defective. / Feed sensor is defective.)


1) Open the DCF Take Away-Cover. Remove the jammed paper.

2) Remove tray4. Remove the jammed paper. Close the DCF Take Away-Cover and insert tray4.

3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers below.

a) Remove tray3 and tray4.


c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(

JC93-00540A

).

4) If pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers have no problem, check the following.

a) Remove the DCF pick up unit2. Check if the feed sensor cable is connected correctly.

b) Check if the sensor cable on DCF board is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(

0604-001381

).

d) Install the DCF pick up unit2.

5) If the problem persists after checking step 3~4, check the following : a) Remove the DCF pick up unit2. Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.

b) When pushing the pickup lever, check if the pick up rollers are down.


4-124

4. Troubleshooting c) Replace the DCF pick up unit2(

JC93-00513A

) or defective part.

6) Check the DCF feed motor.

a) Check if the DCF feed motor cable is connected correctly.

b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF feed drive unit(

JC93-00447A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.2 DCF Feed Motor

)

7) Check the DCF pick up motor.

a) Check if the DCF pick up motor cable is connected correctly.

b) If the connection is OK, replace the DCF pick up drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.3 DCF Pick Up Motor

)


► Error Code

H1-1422



► Symptom

Tray 4 is pulled out or the auto size sensor connector is not connected or is broken.



2) If the problem persists, remove tray3 and tray4. Look inside machine.

3) Check if the auto size sensor cable is connected correctly. Unplug and reconnect it.

4. Troubleshooting

4) If the connection is OK, replace the auto size sensor(

JC93-00018A

).

5) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board(

JC92-02453A

).

(


)


4-126

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1–1451

H1–1452




► Symptom

Paper in tray4 is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.


1) Remove tray4. Load the paper in tray4.

2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following.




0604-001393


d) If the actuator(

JC66-03199A



4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1-1453


Input System Failure #H1-1453 : Pull Tray 4 out and insert it.

► Symptom





3) If the problem persists, turn the machine off.


5) Check if the connection between the DCF pick up drive and DCF board is correct.

6) If the connection is OK, replace the pick up drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.33.3. DCF Pick Up Motor

)





0604-001393



4-128

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H1-5323


Tray door is open. Close the door

► Symptom

DCF Takeaway-Cover is open. / I/L-Switch harness or connector is defective.


1) Open and close the DCF Take away-Cover correctly.


a) Check if I/L-Switch(HARNESS-DCF COVER OPEN)(

JC39–01696A

) is not operating normally. If it is defective, replace it.

b) If the I/L Switch is OK, replace the DCF board(

JC92–02453A

).

(


)


► Error Code

H1-5330


DCF Failure #H1-5330. Check internal DCF connection.

► Symptom

A communication error between the optional tray and the main machine has occurred.


1) Lift up and release the DCF unit from the machine.


4. Troubleshooting

3) Check if the interface connector is connected to the DCF board. If the interface connector(

JC39–01690A


4) If the problem persists, replace the DCF board.

(


)


4-130

4. Troubleshooting

4.5.4. H2-xxxx (Finisher) type error code

► Error Code

H2–6700

H2–6701

H2–6702

H2–6703

H2–6704

H2–6705




► Symptom

Paper failed to pass finisher's paper transportation path within the specified time.


1) Open finisher jam cover, and make sure that the paper is on the paper path. If there is paper, remove paper manually.

2) If the error does not disappear even after removing paper and closing finisher jam door, follow the instructions below: a) Does finisher input sensor work well?

i) Make sure finisher input sensor cable is connected well to the sensor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher input sensor cable is connected well to the main board connector.

iii) Replace the finisher input sensor(

JC81–09686A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.34.1 Finisher Main Motor

)

4-131 iv) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.34.2. Finisher Board

) b) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6706



► Symptom

Transport motor doesn’t work.


1) Open finisher jam cover to check if there is a paper jam. If there is paper, remove paper manually. Then close door to do finisher initialization.

2) If transport motor is still not running and the error does not disappear, follow the instructions below: a) Does finisher transport motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher transport motor cable is connected well to the transport motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher transport motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.

iii) Replace the finisher transport motor(

JC81–09677A

).

(


) iv) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(


) b) Does finisher input sensor work well?




JC81–09686A

).

(



JC81–9692A

).

(


) c) Does finisher motor gear set work well?

i) Make sure gear set can rotate smoothly.

ii) Make sure each gear is not broken.

iii) Replace the gear set(

JC81-09592A / J81-09593A / JC81-09595A / JC81-09596A

).

d) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4-132

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6707 ~ H2–6725


Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher

► Symptom

Component does not move to or leave home position.


1) If there is jammed paper on the paper path, remove paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam cover to check if finisher executes initialization process.

2) If component still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below: a) Does finisher input sensor work well?




JC81–09686A

).

(



JC81–09692A

).

(


) b) Does finisher component motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher component motor cable is connected well to the motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher component motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.

iii) Replace the finisher component motor(

JC81–09680A / JC81–09681A

).

iv) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Do finisher component parts work well?

i) Make sure component parts can move or rotate smoothly.

ii) Make sure there is no any mechanical interference to stop moving or rotating.

iii) Make sure the belt is tight on the correct position, if it has the belt.

d) Does finisher component motor gear set work well?



iii) Replace the Eject-Sub Assy.

e) Check if any debris existed. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6726

H2–6727


Finisher Stapler door is open. Close it.

Finisher Jam door is open. Close it.

► Symptom

Finisher door is not closed.


1) Close door to perform finisher initialization. If error does not disappear, follow the instructions below: a) Does finisher door cover close well?

i) The finisher door cover can close well.

ii) The finisher door cover can contact and push input sensor switch well.

iii) The finisher input sensor switch can be pushed well.

iv) Replace finisher cover door(

JC81–09577A

) or Switch(

JC81–09687A

).

b) Does finisher input sensor work well?




JC81–09686A

).

(



JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Check if any debris exists. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4-134

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6728

H2–6729

H2–6730

H2–6731


Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher.

► Symptom

Finisher stapler head does not move to or leave home position.


1) If there is jammed paper on the stapler, removing paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam cover to check if finisher executes initialization process.

2) If stapler still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below : a) Can finisher stapler cartridge can be pulled out?

i) Rotate stapler gear manually to move stapler head back to home (top) position.

ii) Remove staple completely from stapler cartridge.

iii) Remove staples from inside stapler.

b) Does finisher stapler input sensor work well?



iii) Replace the finisher stapler(

JC81–07376A

).


JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Does finisher stapler motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the stapler motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.


JC81–07376A

).


JC81–09692A

).

(


) d) Check if any debris (staple) exists. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6732

H2–6733


Staple cartridge is low. Replace it.

Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it.

► Symptom

Finisher stapler cartridge is necessary to refill.


1) Open finisher stapler door to refill cartridge and then close door. Self-Priming will execute automatically if necessary. If stapler error or warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below : a) Does finisher stapler cartridge refill box fit well?

i) Make sure stapler refill box fit well into cartridge.

ii) Make sure staples do not jam near stapler head.





JC81–07376A

).


JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4-136

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6734



► Symptom

Finisher stapler cartridge refill failed.


1) Open finisher stapler door to refill cartridge and then close door. Self-Priming will execute automatically if necessary. If stapler error or warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below : a) Does finisher stapler cartridge refill box fit well?

i) Make sure stapler refill box fit well into cartridge.

ii) Make sure staples do not jam near stapler head.





JC81–07376A

).


JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Does finisher stapler motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the stapler motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher stapler motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.


JC81–07376A

).


JC81–09692A

).

(


) d) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6735


Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper.

► Symptom

Finisher output tray is full.


1) Remove paper from the finisher main tray. Main tray will move downward and upward to clear stack full warning.

2) If warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below : a) Does finisher main tray input sensor (Standby & Home sensor) work well?




JC81–09686A

).

(



JC81–09692A

).

(


) b) Does finisher main tray motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher main tray motor cable is connected well to the main tray motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher main tray motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.

iii) Replace the finisher main tray motor(

JC81–09679A

).

(


)


4-138

4. Troubleshooting iv) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Check if any debris (staple) is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6736 ~ H2–6743


Finisher Failure: #H2-67xx. Check finisher

► Symptom

Main Tray does not move to or leave home position.


1) If there is jammed paper on the Main Tray, removing paper manually. Open and close finisher stapler door or jam cover to check if finisher executes initialization process.

2) If Main Tray still doesn’t go back to home position and error does not disappear, follow the instructions below: a) Does finisher input sensor (Standby & Home sensor) work well?




JC81–09686A

).

(



JC81–09692A

).

(


) b) Does finisher Main Tray motor work well?

i) Make sure finisher Main Tray motor cable is connected well to the motor connector.

ii) Make sure finisher Main Tray motor cable is connected well to the main board connector.

iii) Replace the finisher Main Tray motor(

JC81–09679A

).

(



JC81–09692A

).

(


) c) Do finisher Main Tray parts work well?

i) Make sure Main Tray parts can move or rotate smoothly.

ii) Make sure there are no mechanical interference to stop moving or rotating.

iii) Make sure the belt is tight in the correct position, if it has a belt.

d) Does finisher Main Tray motor gear set work well?




4-140

4. Troubleshooting iii) Replace the gear set(

JC81–9585A / JC81–09586A

).

e) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6744


Staple Cartridge not install. Install it.

► Symptom

Finisher stapler cartridge is not installed into stapler.


1) Open finisher stapler door to put cartridge into stapler and then close door. Self-Priming will be execute automatically if necessary.

2) If stapler warning does not disappear, follow the instructions below : a) Does finisher stapler input sensor work well?



iii) Replace the finisher stapler cartridge(

JC81–08653A

).

iv) Replace the finisher stapler(

JC81–07376A

).

v) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(


) b) Check if any debris is present. Please make sure to remove any debris.


4-142

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

H2–6A50


Finisher Failure: #H2-6A50. Check finisher.

► Symptom

Communication error with finisher has occurred.


1) Copier power off and power on. If the error does not disappear, follow the instructions below:

2) Does finisher work well?

a) Make sure finisher interface cable is connected with main board.

b) Replace the finisher main board(

JC81–09692A

).

(


)

► Error Code

H2–6A63


Finisher Failure: #H2-6A63. Check finisher.

► Symptom

Finisher stapler cartridge is not installed into stapler or Staples are empty.


1) Replace the finisher stapler(

JC81–07376A

).


4.5.5. Mx-xxxx type error code

► Error Code

M1–1113

M2–1121



► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred in tray1.


1) Open the side cover and check if a foreign substance or paper is jammed inside the machine.

2) Remove tray1 and remove the jammed paper.

3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the pick up unit1.



4. Troubleshooting c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(

JC93–00540A

).

(Refer to 3.2.5. Pickup_Reverse_Forward roller)

4) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit1 and feed sensor.

a) Check if the pickup unit1 and feed sensor operate correctly.

b) Check if the pickup unit1 harness is connected to the main board correctly.

c) Check if the connector of the Guide-feed assembly is connected correctly.

d) Check if the harness of pickup unit and feed sensor are connected correctly.

5) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit1.

a) Remove the pickup unit and check the actuator and photo-sensor.


4-144

4. Troubleshooting b) Push the pickup-lever and check if it operates correctly.

6) If the problem persists, replace the pickup drive unit(

JC93–00422A

) or Pickup unit1(

JC93-00511A

).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit)

(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and Sensor)


► Error Code

M1–1213

M2–1131



► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred in tray2.


1) Open the side cover and check if a foreign substance or paper is jammed inside the machine.

2) Remove tray2 and remove the jammed paper.

3) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the pick up unit1.



4. Troubleshooting c) If the pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(

JC93–00540A

).

(Refer to 3.2.5. Pickup_Reverse_Forward roller)

4) If the problem persists, check the pickup unit2 and feed sensor.

a) Check if the pickup unit2 and feed sensor operate correctly.

b) Check if the pickup unit2 harness is connected to the main board correctly.

c) Check if the connector of the Guide-feed assembly is connected correctly.

d) Check if the harness of pickup unit and feed sensor are connected correctly.

e)


a) Remove the pickup unit2 and check the actuator and photo-sensor.


4-146

4. Troubleshooting b) Push the pickup-lever and check if it operates correctly.

6) If the problem persists, replace the pickup drive unit2(

JC93–00422A

) or Pickup unit1(

JC93-00512A

).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive unit)

(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-up Unit and Sensor)


► Error Code

M1–1610


Paper jam in MP Tray.

► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred in MP tray.


1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper from the MP tray.

2) If this jam error occurs frequently, check the rollers of the MP unit.

4. Troubleshooting a) Check if MP pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are assembled correctly.

b) If the MP pick up/ reverse/ forward rollers are worn out or contaminated, replace the defective roller(

JC93–00540A

).

(Refer to 3.2.2.8. MP Pick up_Reverse_Forward roller)

3) If the problem persists, check if the MP solenoid operates correctly.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute MP solenoid test.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 101-0271)

b) If the MP solenoid operation is abnormal, check the harness connection of MP unit.

c) If the harness has no defects, replace the MP solenoid(

JC33–00029B

).

4) If the problem persists, check the Regi/MPdrive unit.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute Regi./MP motor test.


b) Remove the rear cover.

c) Check if the motor harness is connected correctly.


4-148

4. Troubleshooting d) If the problem occurs, replace the Regi/MP Drive Unit(

JC93–00443A

).

(Refer to 3.3.17. Regi_MP Drive unit)


► Error Code

M1-3122



► Symptom



1) Remove and insert Tray1 correctly.

2) If Tray1 is not locked or pulled out without holding the locking lever, remove Tray1.

3) Check if foreign substance or paper is inside the space between Tray1,2. If so, please remove it.

4) If the problem persists, check that the auto size sensor is connected properly.

(Refer to 3.3.20. Auto Size sensor)

4. Troubleshooting

5) If the problem persists, replace the main board(

JC92–02452A

).


4-150

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M1-3222



► Symptom



1) Remove and insert Tray2 correctly.

2) If Tray2 is not locked or pulled out without holding the locking lever, remove Tray2.

3) Check if foreign substance or paper is inside the space between Tray1,2. If so, please remove it.

4) If the problem persists, check that the auto size sensor is connected properly.

(Refer to 3.3.20. Auto Size sensor)


JC92–02452A

).


► Error Code

M1-4111


Input System Failure #M1–4111 : Pull Tray 1 out and insert it.

► Symptom



1) Remove tray1 and re-install it.

2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off then on.

3) Enter SVC mode. Execute pickup motor test.


4) If the pick up motor operation is abnormal, turn the machine off.


6) Check if the connection between pickup drive unit1 and main board is secure.

4. Troubleshooting

7) If the connection is OK, replace the pickup drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive Unit)


(Refer to 3.3.24. Pick-Up Unit and Sensor)

a) Check if the photo sensor in the pickup unit1 is defective.

b) If the sensor(

0604–001393



4-152

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M1-4211


Input System Failure #M1-4211 : Pull Tray 2 out and insert it.

► Symptom



1) Remove tray2 and re-install it.

2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off then on.

3) Enter SVC mode. Execute pickup motor test.


4) If the pick up motor operation is abnormal, turn the machine off.


6) Check if the connection between pickup drive unit2 and main board is secure.

4-153

7) If the connection is OK, replace the pickup drive unit(

JC93-00442A

).

(Refer to 3.3.15. Pick-up Drive Unit)



a) Check if the photo sensor in the pickup unit2 is defective.

b) If the sensor(

0604–001393



► Error Code

M1–5111

M1-5112




► Symptom

Paper in the tray1 is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.


1) Remove tray 1. Load paper in the tray. And insert tray 1.

2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following: a) Turn the machine off. Open the Side Cover.

b) Remove Pick-Up Unit1.


c) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.

4. Troubleshooting d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(

0604–001393

).

e) If the actuator is defective, replace it(

JC66-03199A

).


4-154

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M1–5211

M1–5212




► Symptom

Paper in the tray is less than 10% of specification. / The photo sensor is defective.


1) Remove tray 2. Load paper in the tray, and insert the tray 2.

2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following : a) Turn the machine off. Open the Side Cover.

b) Remove Pick-Up Unit2.


c) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.

d) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(

0604–001393

).

e) If the actuator is defective, replace it(

JC66-03199A

).


► Error Code

M1–5612


Paper is empty in MP Tray. Load paper.

► Symptom

Paper in the MP tray is less than 10%. / The photo sensor is defective.


1) Load the paper in the MP tray.

2) If paper is loaded but error message has not disappeared, check the following :

(Refer to 3.3.22.3. MP unit)

a) If the photo sensor is contaminated, clean it.

4. Troubleshooting b) If the photo sensor is defective, replace it(

0604–001393

).

c) If the actuator is defective, replace it(

JC66-03217A

).


4-156

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M2–1124

M2–1125


Paper jam inside of machine.

► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Feed drive unit is defective / Feed 1 sensor is defective.)


• M2–1124 : The leading edge of the paper has not reached the feed 1 sensor within the specified time.

• M2-1125 : The paper has not left from the feed 1 sensor within the specified time.

1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper.

2) If jammed paper occurs continually, check the following.

a) Enter SVC mode. Execute feed motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).

b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the feed motor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed drive unit(

JC93-00444A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.16. Feed Drive unit

) d) If the feed motor operation is normal, check the feed 1 sensor.

e) If the sensor operation is abnormal, check the harness.

4-157 f) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor(

0604-001381

).

(

Refer to 3.3.25. Feed sensor

)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M2–1134

M2–1135



► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Feed drive unit is defective / Feed 2 sensor is defective.)






a) Enter SVC mode. Execute feed motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).

b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the feed motor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the feed drive unit(

JC93-00444A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.16. Feed Drive unit

) d) If the feed motor operation is normal, check the feed 2 sensor.


f) If the connection is OK, replace the feed sensor 2 (

0604-001381

).

(

Refer to 3.3.26. Feed Unit

)


4-158

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M2–1211

M2–1213

M2–1214



► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred inside the machine. (Regi. roller drive is defective / Regi. sensor is defective.)


• M2–1211 : When the machine is warming-up, jammed paper inside machine is detected.

• M2–1213 : The leading edge of the paper has not reached the regi. sensor within the specified time.

• M2-1214 : The paper has not left from the regi. sensor within the specified time.



a) Enter SVC mode. Execute Regi. motor test. If the motor operation is normal, go to step d).

b) Remove the rear cover. Check if the Regi/MP motor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the Regi./MP drive unit(

JC93-00443A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.16. Regi./MP Drive unit

) d) If the motor operation is normal, check the regi. sensor.


4-159 f) If the connection is OK, replace the regi. sensor (

0604-001381

).

(

Refer to 3.3.27. Registration Unit

)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M2–1331

M2–1333

M2–1334

M2–2111

M2–2113

M2–2114




► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred inside the machine.


1) Open the side cover. Remove jammed paper.

2) If the problem persists, check the following: a) Check the Regi sensor harness. If the harness is normal, replace the Regi. sensor (

0604-001381

).

(

Refer to 3.3.27. Registration Unit

) b) Check the sensors in the Side Unit. If the harness is normal, replace the defective sensor (

0604-001393

).

(

Refer to 3.3.22.1. Fuser out sensor / 3.3.22.2. Duplex sensor and Curl sensor

)


4-160

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M3–1411


Paper jam in exit area.

► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.(At power-on / warm up , the machine detected paper jam in Inner tray Exit Sensor.)




1) Open the side cover. Remove jammed paper.

2) If the problem persists, check the following: a) Open the side cover. Check if the connector is connected correctly.

b) Remove the JOB-SEPARATOR. Check if the photo sensor is assembled correctly.

c) Check if ACTUATOR-EXIT is assembled correctly. If the ACTUATOR-EXIT (

JC66-02533A

) is deformed or broken, replace it.

4-161 d) If the photo sensor(

0604-001393



4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M3–1413

M3–1414


Paper jam in exit area.

► Symptom

Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.(Job separator connection is defective. / Actuator-Exit is defective.)



2) If the problem persists, check the following: a) Open the side cover. Check if the connector is connected properly.

b) Remove the JOB-SEPARATOR. Check if the photo sensor is assembled correctly.

c) Check if ACTUATOR-EXIT is assembled correctly. If the ACTUATOR-EXIT (

JC66-02533A

) is deformed or broken, replace it.

d) If the photo sensor(

0604-001393



4-162

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

M3–2230

M3–2430


Output tray is full. Remove printed media.

► Symptom

There is too much paper in output bin tray or inner tray.


• M3-2230 : There is too much paper in output bin tray.

• M3-2430 : There is too much paper in inner tray.

1) Remove the paper from output bin tray or inner tray.

2) If this error ccurs continually, check the following.

a) Check if the bin-full sensor and actuator is assembled correctly.

4-163 b) Check if the bin-full sensor(

0604–001393

) is defective.


4.5.6. Sx-xxxx type error code

► Error Code

S1–1113


Video System Failure #S1-1113: Turn off then on.

► Symptom

The system has some problems due to CPU overheating.



2) Wait until the machine is cool, and then turn the machine on.

3) If the problem persistss, turn the machine off again.


(

Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover

)

5) Replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.7 Main Board

)

NOTE

Insert the MSOK to the new main board.

6) Assemble the rear cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting


4-164

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S1–1313


The clock became initial time. Set a time again.

► Symptom

Saved time is invalid


1) Set up the time and reboot the machine.

a) Select “Machine Setup” on touch screen.

b) Select “General Setting”.

c) Select “Date and Time” and set the time.

2) If the problem persistss, check the following.

a) Remove the rear cover.

(


) b) Remove the fax holder from the main board.

c) Measure the voltage of the battery. If the battery is normal, the measured value is over 3V.

4-165

3) If the battery is normal, replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).


► Error Code

S1–2111



► Symptom

The machine can’t detect memory during booting.





(


)


JC92–02429A

).

(


)

NOTE

Insert the MSOK to the new main board.

5) Assemble the rear cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting


4-166

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S1–2411

S1–2421

S1–2422


HDD System Failure #S1-2411: Turn off then on.



► Symptom

Hard Disk is not installed in the machine. / Hard Disk is defective.


1) Check if the HDD is installed correctly.

a) Remove the rear cover.

(


) b) Check if the HDD cable is connected correctly.

2) If the problem persistss, replace the HDD(

JC59–00035A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.32 HDD

)


► Error Code

S1–2433

S1–2443

S1–2444

S1–2445

S1–2446

S1–2447

S1–2448

S1–2449










► Symptom

HDD partition is full or corrupted.


1) Enter SVC mode. Select “System Recovery” in Service Function menu.

(

Refer to 4.4.6.8 System Recovery

)

2) Execute hard disk format and firmware re-installation.

(

Refer to 4.3. Updating Firmware

)


JC59–00035A

).

(


)

4. Troubleshooting


4-168

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S1–2434

S1–2435

S1–2436

S1–2437

S1–2438

S1–2439


HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide.






► Symptom

HDD partition or memory is full.


NOTE

• S1-2434 : Addresses in Address book / User data in User profile

• S1-2435 : Documents in Document box / Jobs in Secure job list / Fonts / Forms

• S1-2436 : System Logs

• S1-2437/3438/3439 : Printing Error / No Paper in Tray

1) Enter SVC mode. Select “Hard Disk Maintenance” in Service Function menu.

(

Refer to 4.4.6.2 Hard Disk Maintenance

)

2) Execute hard disk format.


JC59–00035A

).

(


)


► Error Code

S1–2510

S1–2511

S1–2520

S1–2521

S1–2523

S1–2540


MSOK System Failure #S1-2510: Turn off then on.

MSOK System Failure #S1-2511: Turn off then on.

MSOK Failure: #S1-2520. Call for service.

MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service

PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK

MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK

► Symptom

MSOK is not installed properly. / MSOK is defective.



(


)

2) Check if the MSOK is inserted correctly. Remove and reinstall it.

4. Troubleshooting


JC92–02429A

).

(


)


4-170

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S1–3110



► Symptom

The main board is defective.





JC92–02429A

).


► Error Code

S1–4111



► Symptom

The main board can’t send the data through the network channel.


1) Check if the green LED of the network port is on.

4-171

2) If not, unplug and reconnect the network cable.


JC92–02429A

).

(


)


► Error Code

S1–4311



► Symptom

The USB device chip is defective.




3) Remove and disassemble the OPE unit.

(

Refer to 3.3.6 OPE Unit

)

4) Replace the OPE main board(

JC92–02436A

).

5) Assemble the OPE unit.


4. Troubleshooting


4-172

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S1–5521


FDI device is not installed. Install the device.

► Symptom

The machine can’t detect the FDI device.


1) Install the FDI device.

2) If the FDI device is already installed, update the firmware for main board.

(

Refer to 4.3. Updating Firmware

)


(


)

4) Check the connection between FDI device and main board.

5) If the FDI device(

CLX-KIT10F

) is defective, replace it..

6) If the problem persistss, replace the main board(

JC92-02429A

).


► Error Code

S2–1211

S2–2311

S2–3110





► Symptom

The main board is defective.





JC92–02429A

).


► Error Code

S2–3114


Engine System Failure #S2-3114: Turn off then on.

► Symptom

ACR error has occurred.


1) Execute “ACR calibration” manually.

(

Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration

)

2) Clean the ACR sensor.

(

Refer to 3.2.1.1. Cleaning the ACR/CTD sensor window

)

3) If the problem persistss, replace the main board(

JC92-02429A

).

4. Troubleshooting


4-174

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S2–4210


Front door is open. Close it.

► Symptom

Front cover or Side cover is opened.


1) Close the front cover correctly.

2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.

3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.

(

Refer to 3.3.30. Side Cover Open Switch.

)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S2–4410


Right door is open. Close it.

► Symptom

Front cover or Side cover is opened.


1) Close the side cover correctly.

2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.

3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.

(

Refer to 3.3.31. Front Cover Open Switch.

)

► Error Code

S2–5111 / S2–5112 / S2–5120 / S2–5131 / S2–5132 / S2–5133 / S2–5135 / S2–5136 / S2–5161 / S2–5164 / S2–5210 /

S2–5240



► Symptom

ACR execution is failed.



2) If the problem persists, check the followings.

• Check if the ACR sensor is contaminated or defective. Clean the ACR sensor or replace it.

• Remove and reinstall the ITB unit. If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.


4-176

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S3–3121


Scanner is locked.

► Symptom

Scanner module does not move.


1) Turn off the machine then on. Check if the scanner module works normally.

2) If the initial operation does not occurred normally, turn the machine off.

3) Remove the scan glass.

(

Refer to 3.3.29.2. Scan glass

)

4) Check if the home position sensor cable is connected correctly.

5) Remove the scan rear cover. Check if all cables on scan joint board are connected correctly.

4-177

6) If the connection is OK, replace the scan joint board(

JC92-02447A

).

(

Refer to 3.3.29.1. Scanner joint board

)


► Error Code

S3–3211


Scan System Failure #S3-3211: Turn off then on.

► Symptom

DADF is not connected or communication error occurs with CIP6 board.


1) Turn the machine off then on. If the problem persists, check the following:

2) Turn the machine off again.

3) Remove the scan rear cover. Check if the connector on scan joint board is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting

4) Remove the DADF rear cover. Check if the connector on DADF board is connected correctly.

(

Refer to 3.3.28.4. DADF main board

)

5) If the connection is OK, replace the DADF board(

JC92-02446A

).


4-178

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S4–3111


Fax System Failure: #S4-3111. Install fax modem card again

► Symptom

Fax card is not installed properly. / Fax card is defective.


1) Remove and reinstall the fax card.

2) If the fax card is defective, replace it.


► Error Code

S5–3111


UI System Failure #S5-3111:Turn off then on.

► Symptom

Communication error between main board and OPE board has occurred.



(


)

2) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the main board correctly.

4. Troubleshooting

3) Remove and disassemble the OPE Unit.

(

Refer to 3.3.6 OPE Unit

)

4) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the OPE board correctly.

5) If the connection is OK, replace the main board(

JC92–02429A

).


4-180

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S6–3122


Network cable is disconnected. Check it.

► Symptom

Network cable is disconnected.


1) Check if the green LED of the network port is on.

2) If not, unplug and reconnect the network cable.


JC92–02429A

).

(


)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S6–3123

S6–3128

S6–3229

S6–322A


This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it.

802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator.

The IPv4 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it.

The IPv6 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system. Check it.

► Symptom

Network error. (IP address conflicts with that of another system. / Communication error / There is no response when checking the ping test.)


• Change the machine’s IP address.

1) Select “Machine Setup” on the touch screen.

2) Select “Networking Setting”.

3) “Log-In”.

4) Select “TCP/IP”.

5) Select the proper item for your machine.

6) Select “IP Setting”.

7) Select the proper item for your machine.

8) Change the IP address.


4-182

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

S6–3224

S6–3225

S6–3226

S6–3227


This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it.

802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator.

► Symptom

BOOTP or DHCP server has a problem or IP address assignment is abnormal.


• Check the BOOTP or DHCP server.

• If the server is normal, check the network setting.

► Error Code

S7–1110



► Symptom

24V power is abnormal.


1) Check the 24V pin on SMPS board. If it is abnormal, replace the SMPS board.

2) Check the related cable.

3) If the SMPS is normal, replace the main board.

► Error Code

S7–2110


Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on

► Symptom

Heater control relay is abnormal.


1) Turn the machine off. Re-install the fuser unit, then turn the machine on.

2) If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit(

110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A

).

(Refer to 3.2.2.5 Fuser unit)


4. Troubleshooting

4.5.7. U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code

► Error Code

U1–2113

U1–2119


Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113.


► Symptom

The thermistor can’t measure temperature. The hear-roller will not heat-up.



(Refer to 3.2.2 Fuser unit)

2) Remove the fuser unit. After openinging the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.

3) If the problem persists, check the following :

(Refer to 3.3.23. Fuser unit)

a) Check if the Halogen lamp

(110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631)

is broken or disconnected.

b) Check if the AC connection of the Halogen lamp is disconnected or contaminated.


4-184

4. Troubleshooting c) Check if the thermostat

(4712-001098)

is disconnected.

d) Check if the non-contact type thermistor

(1404–001453)

is broken.

4) If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit

(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).

5) If the problem persists, replace the Main board

(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2115


Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on.

► Symptom

The pressure control unit(Cam unit)of the fuser is abnormal.



(Refer to 3.2.2. Fuser Unit)

2) If the problem persists, check the following :

(Refer to 3.3.23. Fuser Unit)

a) When the side-cover closes, check if the operation sound of the pressure control unit occurs.

b) Check if the parts of the pressure control unit are abnormal.

- Check if the shape of the CAM-REAR

(JC66-03299A)

) is broken.

- Check if there are abnormal parts of the pressure control unit.

c) Check if the fuser-motor is abnormal via SVC mode.



(110V : JC91–01064A, 220V : JC91–01063A)

4) If the problem persists, replace the pressure control unit or cam-motor or Main board

(JC92-02452A)

.


4-186

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2132

U1–2135




► Symptom

Temperature of the fuser increases abnormally.




2) Check if the power voltage is normal. (Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated voltage?)

3) Remove the fuser unit. After openinging the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.

4) If the problem persists, Check the following :



(110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631)





(4712-001098)

is disconnected.


(1404–001453)

is broken.


(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).


(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4-188

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2141

U1–2142




► Symptom

Temperature of the thermistor is higher than the maximum allowable temperature.





3) Remove the fuser unit. After opening the jam cover, check if jammed or wrapped paper is in the fuser unit.



a) Check if the non-contact type thermistor

(1404–001453)

is broken.


(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).


(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2316

U1–2317




► Symptom

Temperature of the fuser changes abnormally.








(110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631)



c) Check if the thermistat

(4712-001098)

is disconnected.

d) Check if non-contact type thermistor

(1404–001453)

is broken.


(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).


4-190

4. Troubleshooting


(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2335

U1–233A



Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-233A.

► Symptom

Temperature of the thermistor is abnormally low.









(110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631)




4-192


(4712-001098)

is disconnected.


(1404–001453)

is broken.


(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).


(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U1–2337

U1–233D



Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-233D.

► Symptom

When the fuser warms-up, the temperature of the thermistor is abnormally low.



(Refer to 3.2.2 Fuser unit)



4) If the problem persists, Check the follows.



(110V : 4713-001630 / 220V : 4713–001631)




4-194


(4712-001098)

is disconnected.

d) Check if thenon-contact type thermistor

(1404–001453)

is broken.


(110V : JC91-01064A, 220V : JC91-01063A).


(JC92-02429A)

or FDB board

(110V : JC44-00210A, 220V :

JC44-00211A)

, SMPS

(110V : JC44-00093A, 220V : JC44-00100A)


4. Troubleshooting

4.5.8. U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code

► Error Code

U2–6121

U2–6122

U2–6123


LSU Failure #U2-6121: Turn off then on.



► Symptom

LSU motor does not operate or it operates abnormally. Motor ready signal is abnormal.


1) Turn the machine off then on. Check for the LSU motor operation sound during warm-up.

2) Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

3) If the problem persists, check the following : a) If the LSU motor makes a sound, i) Enter SVC mode to check the LSU motor ready signal.

(

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

)

• Press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934” and press the “OK” button.

ii) Select “LSU Motor1 Run Ready”. (

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >

110-0000

) iii) Press ‘Start’ button. Check that the status has changed to ‘Executing -> Low -> High’.

iv) If the status has not changed, the motor ready signal is abnormal. Replace the LSU. (

JC97-04010A

) (

Refer to 3.3.5. LSU in chapter 3

) b) If the LSU motor does not makes a sound, i) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable. Check that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.


4-196

4. Troubleshooting ii) Turn the machine off and remove the rear cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable on main board.

Check that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.

iii) If the LSU cable(

JC39-01688A

) is defective, replace it. Check that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.

iv) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(

JC97-04010A

).


4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U2–6142

U2–6143




► Symptom

Hsync signal of the LSU is abnormal.


1) Turn the machine off then on. Check for the LSU motor operation sound during warm-up.

2) Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

3) If the problem persists, check the following : a) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable. Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

b) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable on main board. Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.

c) If the LSU cable(

JC39-01688A

) is defective, replace it. Check that the LSU motor makes a sound after turning the machine on.

d) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(

JC97-04010A

).


4-198

4. Troubleshooting

4.5.9. U3-xxxx type error code

► Error Code

U3–3211

U3–3213

U3–3214

U3–3311

U3–3313

U3–3314


Original paper jam inside of scanner

► Symptom

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.


1) Open the DADF cover. If there is jammed paper, remove it.

2) If this error occurs continually, check the DADF regi. sensor(

0604-001393

) and regi actuator(

JC66–03148A

). If their operation is abnormal, replace the defective part.

3) If the regi sensor is OK, check the scan sensor(

0604-001393

) and scan actuator(

JC66–03210A

). If their operation is abnormal, replace the defective part.

4-199

4) Check if the regi. clutch operates normally. Check if the clutch cable is connected correctly. If the clutch(

JC47–00033A



► Error Code

U3–3413

U3–3414


Original paper jam inside of scanner.

► Symptom




2) If this error occurs continually, check the following: a) Check if the Regi. actuator(

JC66–03148A

) operates normally.

4. Troubleshooting b) Check if the Regi. sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the Regi. sensor(

0604-001393

).


4-200

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U3–3513

U3–3514


Original paper jam inside of scanner.

► Symptom




2) If this error occurs continually, check the following: a) Check if the scan actuator(

JC66-03210A


b) Check if the scan sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the scan sensor(

0604-001393

).


► Error Code

U3–3611

U3–3613

U3–3614

U3–3713



► Symptom




2) If this error occurs continually, check the following: a) Check if the exit actuator(

JC66-03184A


4. Troubleshooting b) Check if the exit sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace the exit sensor(

0604-001393

).


4-202

4. Troubleshooting

► Error Code

U3–4210


Top door of scanner is open.

► Symptom

DADF cover is open.


1) Close the DADF cover properly.

2) If this error occurs continually, Check the following: a) Check the DADF cover open sensor(

0604-001393

) and its harness. If there is a defective part, replace it.

b) If both of them are normal, check the Cover-Open Rib. If it is broken, replace the Cover-Open(

JC63-03273A

).


4. Troubleshooting

4.6. Image quality problems and solutions

Print-quality defects can be attributed to printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external software applications and environmental conditions.

To successfully troubleshoot print-quality problems, as many variables as possible must be eliminated.

The first step is to generate prints using printable pages embedded in the printer on laser paper. The paper should be from an unopened ream that has been acclimated to room temperature and you should ensure that genuine Samsung Toner is installed in the printer.

Samsung A/S chart (A3)


4-204

4. Troubleshooting

[H]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[M]

[N]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Grid pattern

Black patches

Barcode

Note area

[A] Halftone band

[B, L] Resolution patterns

[C, D,

E]

Images

[F]

[G]

Map image

Color patches

Gradation pattern

Color/Mono text

Multilingual Feature

White Gap pattern

Rulers

Rulers

For adjusting margin and magnification

For adjusting skew error

For checking the reproduction of barcode

For recording the date, conditions, etc.

For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)

For checking resolution

For checking color reproduction

For checking fine line reproduction

For checking color reproduction and uniformity

For checking tone reproduction of 7 colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/ 10~100%)

For checking the reproduction of color, mono text

For checking the reproduction of small text

For checking color to color, color to mono white gap

For checking the magnification error (unit : cm)

For checking the magnification error (unit : inch)


How to analysis the defect image

See the next flow chart.

TIP

1) According to the part remain life, cause can vary. Check the part remain life.

2)

Check the defect whether periodic or not.

PP

OO WW EE RR !!OO NN

CC

hh ee cc kk !!SS ee tt !!SS tt aa tt uu ss !!&& !!PP aa rr tt ss !!LL iiff ee

11 ..!! CC hh ee cc kk !!OO PP EE !!LL EE DD

22 ..!! PP rr iinn tt !!RR ee pp oo rr tt

33 ..!! PP rr iinn tt !!TT ee ss tt !!PP aa gg ee

oo

pp

AA

nn yy !!IImm aa gg ee !!

DD ee ff ee cc tt ??

zz

ff tt

AA

ss ss uu mm ee !!DD ee ff ee cc tt !! TT yy pp ee !! && !!

CC aa uu ss ee ss

TT

ee ss tt !!aa !! cc aa uu ss ee

PP

rr iinn tt !!TT ee ss tt !!

PP aa gg ee ,,!! CC llee aa rr ??

zz

ff tt

VV

ee rr iiff iicc aa tt iioo nn

(( 22 ~~ 33 !!TT iimm ee ss ))


4. Troubleshooting

4-206

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.1. Vertical Black Band

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step

1

Cause

Charge Roller(CR) is contaminated.

Action

Check if CR is contaminated or not.

2

•

•

ITB belt is contaminated.

ITB cleaning is poor.

ITB Cleaning-Blade is partially broken.

If there are some problems, replace Drum unit.

(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)

Check if ITB belt is contaminated or not.

3 Scanner unit is contaminated.

• Scan glass contamination.

•

•

Mirror contamination.

CCD sensor contamination.

If there are some problems, replace the ITB Cleaner.

(Refer to 3.2.2.3.)

Wipe the contaminated part surface with a soft cloth.

(Refer to 3.3.29.4.)

CAUTION

Fragile parts!


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.2. Vertical White Band, Light Band



Step

1

Cause

A foreign substance is stuck between Developing

Roller(DR) and Blade.

•

The toner on Magnetic-roller is empty partially.

Action

Pull out a foreign substance.

• Make the hook shape sheet. (Transparency sheet is recommended. )

•

•

Put the hook into the gap between DR and Blade.

Pull out a foreign substance.

2 The Carrier of Developer unit is insufficient.

Replace the Developer Unit.

•

•

Check the toner remain.

Check the toner layer on Roller-Magnetic of

Developer Unit is uniform or not.

(Refer to 3.3.2.2.)


4-208

4. Troubleshooting

Step Cause Action

3 The path of laser beam is blocked.

Foreign substance is on the LSU window.

Clean the LSU window.

(Refer to 3.2.1.2.)

4 OPC is scratched.

Replace the Drum Unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.1.)


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.3. Horizontal periodic Black Band or Dot



Step

1

Cause

Horizontal periodic dot. (CR, 37.7mm)

•

•

The surface of the charge roller(CR) is contaminated.

CR is scratched.

2

3

Horizontal periodic black band.(CR, 37.7mm)

• CR is inferior in quality.

OPC is damaged.

Action

Wipe the surface of contaminated part with a soft cloth and alcohol.

Replace the Drum unit.

(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)


(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)


(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)


4-210

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.4. Horizontal periodic Light/Dark Band or Dot



Step

1

2

Cause

Horizontal periodic band (OPC, 94.2 mm)

•

•

OPC was exposed for a long time.

OPC is damaged by high voltage in a short time.

•

•

Horizontal periodic light/dark band (Roller-magnetic,

31.4mm)

Roller-magnetic is inferior in quality.

V-groove of Roller-magnetic surface is not uniform.

Action

As some time passes, most of this trouble will disappear.

If not, replace the Drum Unit.

(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)

Replace the Developer Unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.5. Foggy Image



Step

1

Cause

Voltage of OPC is abnormally low.

2

3

4

HVPS operates abnormally.

• HVPS is damaged or broken.

Toner is over supplied.

•

TC-sensor operates abnormally.

Voltage of OPC is abnormally low.

• T1 Voltage is abnormally high.

Action

Replace Drum unit.

(Refer to 3.3.2.1.)

Replace HVPS board.

(Refer to 3.3.3.)

Replace Toner cartridge.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)

Check the T1 connection in HVPS.

Check if T1–roller spring in ITB is connected correctly.

Replace HVPS board.

(Refer to 3.3.3.)


4-212

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.6. Light Image



Step

1

Cause

TRC operates abnormally.

2 Poor transfer has occurred.

3 Toner is empty.

Toner is abnormally supplied.

Action

Perform TRC 3~4 times.

(Refer to 4.4.5.6.)

Make the jam artificially during print job. Check the image on transfer belt.

If the image on transfer belt is normal, refer to the

Blurred image section.

Check if the toner is remained efficiently. If not, Replace

Toner cartridge.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)

Check if the Toner supply shutter is opened.

4

5

6

Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low.

• Color density becomes low.

TC down and Toner spills

Toner spills by Eraser.

4-213

Replace HVPS board.

(Refer to 3.3.3.)

Replace developer unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)

Check if Eraser is contaminated.

Replace Drum Unit or Developer Unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.2.)


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.7. Blurred Image



Step

1

2

Cause

Humidity of the circumstances and paper.

T2 transfer voltage is low.

3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect.

Action

Change the paper with new and better grade.

Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.

(Refer to 4.4.6.9.)

Check if the connection between T2 high voltage terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.

Check if the connection of HVPS and ITB is correct.

4 HVPS operates abnormally.


If not, replace HVPS or ITB.

Replace HVPS

(Refer to 3.3.3.)

4-214

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.8. Incorrect color registration



Step

1

2

3

Cause

ACR sensor is contaminated.

Circumstances is changed.

Check if the skew is occurs at the cassette or feeding rollers.

Action

Clean the ACR sensor.

(Refer to 3.2.1.1.)

Perform the OPC-ACR.

(Refer to 4.4.5.6.)

Adjust the skew manually.

(Refer to 4.7.)


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.9. Uneven pitch and jitter image



Step

1

Cause

Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands has occurred.

2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands has occurred.

Action

Check if the foreign substance at the drive gears.

•

•

Grease the gears.

•

•

Developer unit gears.

•

Drum unit gears.

Main drive unit gears.

If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.

•

Developer unit.

Drum unit.

Main drive unit.

Check if the LSU is assembled correctly. If not, remove and tighten the screws.

(Refer to 3.3.5.)

If the problem persists, replace LSU

(Refer to 3.3.5.)


4-216

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.10. Skewed image



Step

1

2

3

•

•

•

Cause

Cassette is not installed properly.

Too much paper is loaded in the cassette.

The cassette guide is not set properly.

The surface of pick up/ reverse/ forward roller is contaminated or worn out.

If the skewed image occurs for copy job, check the

DADF installation.

Action

Reinstall the cassette properly.

Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

(Refer to 3.2.2.7.)

Reinstall the DADF unit.

Adjust DADF skew.

(Refer to 4.8.)


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.11. Blank copy



2

3

Step

1

4

Cause

LSU operation error

Action

Check LSU connector for proper connection.

All connectors on HVPS board are connected correctly.

Reconnect.

Check if the related parts are broken.

Replace the HVPS board or Main board or LSU.

Check if the connection between scan joint board and main board is OK.

Reconnect the harness.

If the connection is OK, replace the main board.


4-218

4. Troubleshooting

4.6.12. Poor fusing performance



2

3

Step

1

4

Cause

•

•

Check the paper type.

Depending on what type of paper used, print speed varies.

(ex)

•

Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/) : Full Speed

Heavy weight (106~175g/) : Half Speed

Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/) : Half

Speed

The fuser unit is worn out.

Check if the surface of the fuser belt & pressure roller is scratched.

Check if the temperature control system has problems.

•

•

Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally

Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally.

Action

Check the paper type on control panel is same as paper user uses.

(Refer to 2.2.7.)

Replace the fuser unit.

Replace the fuser unit.

Check the Non-contact thermistor sensor.

5

6

Check the Halogen lamp.

(Refer to 4.5.7. U1–2113)

If you find some problems, replace the broken parts or

Fuser unit.

Check if the pressure control system operates properly.

Check the pressure control system.

(Refer to 4.5.7. U1–2115)

The problem persists, replace Fuser unit.

Paper is wrapped on the Heating roller.

Remove a wrapped paper and print the demo page.

If there are some problems on the printout, replace Fuser unit.


4. Troubleshooting

4.6.13. Stain on the paper back side



Step Section

1 Transfer Roller Assy

Check item

Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out?

Result Action

Yes Clean or replace the Transfer roller

Assembly.

2

3

ITB Unit

4

5

Fuser Unit

Is there any stain caused by a poor cleaning, etc. on the transfer belt?

Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt?

Are the fuser belt and pressure roller dirty?

Check the pressure roller surface is damaged or scratched.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Clean the transfer belt.

If the problem persists, replace ITB unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.6.)

Take off the transfer belt and check if the transfer belt cleaning blade pressure spring and the pressure hook are installed properly.

(Refer to 3.2.2.6.)

Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.

Yes Replace Fuser unit.

(Refer to 3.2.2.5.)


4-220

4. Troubleshooting

4.7. Adjusting the LSU skew error

1) Check the skew error a) Execute the ACR.

(

Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration

) b) Print the ACR report.

(SVC(Tech) mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration)

c) Check [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data in ACR report.

2) Adjusting the skew error a) Open the front cover. Remove the waste toner container.

b) There are 3 skew holes for YMC color. Insert the (+) screw driver and adjust CW, CCW referred to adjustment amount

4-221 i) The standard value for skew is 200. If the skew data in ACR report, the skew adjustment is unnecessary.

ii) Adjustment method

• Skew Data <200 : Rotate the driver in a counterclockwise direction.

ex) Skew Data is 192. : 200-192=8 Click CCW rotation

• Skew Data = 200 : No need to adjustment.

• Skew Data > 200 : Rotate the driver in a clockwise direction.

ex) Skew Data is 213. : 213–200=13 Click CW rotation

NOTE

1 Click is equal to 1/7 dot.


4. Troubleshooting

3) Check the skew error again.

a) Execute the ACR after the skew adjustment.

b) Print the ACR Report.

c) Check the [Y] [M] [C] skew error.

d) If the value for YMC is in 200±7, complete the skew adjustment.

NOTE

If value can not meet the target, repeat the step1~3.


4-222

4. Troubleshooting

4.8. Adjusting the DADF skew

1) Stand the DADF unit. Loosen 4 screws securing the right hinge unit slightly.

b) If the skew image is like a below sample, adjust the hinge unit down. (1 scale => 0.9 mm skew adjustment)

2) Adjust the position of the DADF hinge as the skew status.

a) If the skew image is like a below sample, adjust the hinge unit upward. (1 scale => 0.9 mm skew adjustment)

3) Detach the DADF sponge after adjusting the skew.

Place the DADF sponge on platen glass. And then close the DADF unit to stick the sponge.


4. Troubleshooting

4.9. Troubleshooting Guide

32

33

34

28

29

30

31

NOTE

The service engineer can download all troubleshooting guides in this section from TSP(Technical Support Portal) site.

(http://tsp.samsung.com)

15

16

17

18

19

11

12

13

14

8

9

10

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

No

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Problem Description

Noise of DADF Hinge / Crack of DADF Hinge / DADF can’t be fixed as open

Job pause problem

Toner cartridge detection error

Scan to PC login failure

OPE Panel operation failure

Machine makes noise when paper print out

DADF paper jam (Multi-feed)

Scanner Locked / #U1-2115 error

Job blocking problem

Recognition error of the side cover problem

LCD touch problem

ACR fail problem

Loud noise sound of LSU motor

Script error in Internet Explorer

Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper.

Exit DADF Jam

Paper source setting problem in Visio program

Acoustic noise in Fuser unit

SMPS output voltage drop error

HDD makes a loud noise.

Machine can not feed the paper.

Networking is not working.

LCD is blinking when turning on the power.

Device does not perform initial setup

TC Calibration Error Occurs

How to adjust image distortion

Incorrect time setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish

94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document

Line Skew occurs due to internal module of scanner

706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs

Image registration problem occurs after ACR (Auto Color Registration)

How to handle TRC error & ACR

Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF

Polaris Color - Removing debris from the Developer Unit.


4–226

4–228

4–229

4–231

4–232

4–233

4–234

4–235

4–236

4–237

4–238

4–239

4–240

4–241

4–242

4–243

4–244

4–246

4–247

4–248

4–249

4–251

4–252

4–253

4–254

4–255

4–256

4–257

4–258

4–259

4–260

4–261

4–262

4–263


4-224

4. Troubleshooting

No

35

36

37

38

39

Problem Description

DADF is not recognized and an S3-3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from the platen.

The ADF does not recognize a piece of paper.

Blur occurs on Color printout

"toner cartridge is not installed." error occurs

The soft keyboard window doesn't display in ACR


4–264

4–265

4–266

4–267

4–268


4. Troubleshooting

1) Noise of DADF Hinge / Crack of DADF Hinge / DADF can’t be fixed as open

•

Symptom

:

-

When ADF is opened or closed, the noise from its hinge happened.

-

DADF hinge is cracked.

-

When the DADF unit is lifted to access the platen glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (± 10°). DADF unit does not remain open as expected.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Remove the DADF connector cover.

2) Remove the connector and 1 screw.

3) Lift up and remove the DADF unit.

4) Remove 4 screws from the each hinge unit. And then replace the hinge unit with new one.


4-226

4. Troubleshooting

5) Reassemble the DADF unit again.

•

Part Code Information

Part Code

JC97-03995A

JC97-03996A

Description

DADF-HINGE L

DADF-HINGE R


2) Job pause problem

•

Symptom

: Job is paused.

•

Cause

:

-

User press the stop key.

-

During job pausing process, job status is wrong.

•

Troubleshooting

1) During job pausing process, keep valid state of pause process.

a) Pausing → Paused b) If user press cancel, paused → canceling → canceled.

c) If user press continue, paused → resuming → progressing.

4. Troubleshooting


4-228

4. Troubleshooting

3) Toner cartridge detection error

•

Symptom

: Toner cartridge is installed, but “Not Install” message occurs.

•

Cause

:

-

Toner cartridge is not installed properly.

-

CRUM harness of the toner cartridge is defective.

-

CRUM PBA or CRUM Chip is defective.

-

CRUM connection(Modular connector) is defective.

-

CRUM Joint PBA is defective.

-

Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA

•

Troubleshooting

1) Toner cartridge install problem

-

Check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.

If the cartridge comes out automatically from set, check the cartridge fixing hook.

-

If there are some problems of hook, replace cartridge cap or cartridge.

2) CRUM harness problem of the toner cartridge

-

Check if CRUM harness of the toner cartridge is connected correctly.

Check if modular jack of the toner cartridge is broken or assembled abnormally.

If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with new one.

If the modular jack is entered to the toner cartridge, pull out it with hands.

3) CRUM PBA problem or CRUM data broken

-

Replace the toner cartridge with new one.

4) CRUM connection(Modular connector) installation problem a) Open the front cover. Pull out the toner cartridge.

b) Check the CRUM connection (Modular connector) is installed properly.


4. Troubleshooting c) If the modular connector is not installed properly, open the rear cover and re-install.

5) CURM Joint PBA problem

-

If CRUM Joint PBA has some problems of the modular jack pin or the main board interface connector etc, replace the PBA with new one like No.4.

6) Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA

Check the connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PBA.

If the connection is bad, replace the harness or the CRUM Joint PBA or main board.


4-230

4. Troubleshooting

4) Scan to PC login failure

•

Symptom

: Login failure popup is displayed when the user selects their Scan ID in the Scan to PC menu.

•

Cause

:

-

Anti-virus program blocks executable files if it tries to communicate with external device but it is not digitally signed.

-

Due to 3rd part library, boost ASIO does not work in certain user environment, EPM is not able to receive login event from MFP.

NOTE

If any network security device blocks SNMP protocol communication, login will be failed

•

Troubleshooting

1) If Login Failure problem is happened and Easy Printer Manager lower than 1.03.45.01 version is installed on customer PC, please update Easy Printer Manager to the latest version (from Download Center of Samsung web site)

2) Launch Easy Printer Manager and check whether ‘Enable Scan from Device Panel’ is checked in the Scan to

PC Settings menu.

3) Even though ‘Enable Scan from Device Panel’ is checked but still Login Failure is occurred, please check SNMP communication between PC and MFP has been blocked or not and then allow SNMP communications.

4) If your EPM is equal or higher than 1.05.10.00 but you faced Login Failure issue, Please execute attached

S2PCTroubleshooter and then click the ‘Run diagnose’ button in the ‘diagnose’ tab. Once diagnose is performed, click the ‘Save Log As’ to get debug log. This debug log would be great help for us to analyze the problem.


4. Troubleshooting

5) OPE Panel operation failure

•

Symptom

: Numeric key pad operation is abnormal.

•

Cause

: The burr direction of the ground OPE is wrong. There is a tendency that the burr pushes the touch screen panel.

•

Troubleshooting

-

Replace the Ground OPE.


4-232

4. Troubleshooting

6) Machine makes noise when paper print out

•

Symptom

: Machine makes noise when paper print out

•

Cause

:

-

Lack of grease in gear-train

-

Old type gear is assembled.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Enter the service mode.

Press the 1, 2, 3 keys simultaneously, and enter the password ‘1934’.

2) Execute the fuser motor test.

(Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward)

3) Remove the fuser unit. And execute the fuser motor test again.

4) If the machine still makes noise, replace the “DRIVE-FUSER EXIT” Assy.

Model

CLX-9201/9251/9301 Series

SCX-8123/8128 Series

Part Code

JC93-00441A

JC93-00449A

5) If not, replace the fuser unit.


4. Troubleshooting

7) DADF paper jam (Multi-feed)

•

Symptom

: Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller of the DADF and a paper jam occurs.

•

Troubleshooting

Guide pickup replacement is required when a Regi Out Jam occurs during multi-feeding. This also stabilizes paper path.

NOTE

The friction pad is also replaced when the Guide Pickup is replaced.

[

Replacement Procedure

]

1) Open the Cover-Open Assembly.

2) Remove the DADF separation pad then replace it with new one.

3) Remove the Guide Pickup by pressing the side as shown below.

4) Assemble the new Guide Pickup.

5) Update the firmware as the latest version.


4-234

4. Troubleshooting

8) Scanner Locked / #U1-2115 error

•

Symptom

: Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller of the DADF and a paper jam occurs.

•

Cause

: All 24V channels output voltage is off (24V output voltage is nearly 0V) and 5V channels output is normal.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether 24V voltage comes out or not.

2) If 24V voltage doesn’t come out, check ‘24V on/off signal pin’ on the main board.

a) The voltage at ‘24V on/off signal pin’ is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.

b) The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal.

3) If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts( i.e. Fuser, motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the SMPS.

4) If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect some harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the SMPS.

5) If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness, connector and main board.


9) Job blocking problem

•

Symptom

: Job is blocking (in case of scanning completion)

•

Cause

:

-

User press stop key during scanning.

-

During job pausing process, scanning is completed.

•

Troubleshooting

1) During job pausing process, lock the state, check whether scanning or printing is completed.

4. Troubleshooting


4-236

4. Troubleshooting

10) Recognition error of the side cover problem

•

Symptom

: The side cover is closed, but the open message of the side cover displays on LCD.

•

Cause

: The spring plate of the side cover open sensor is deformed by the deformation of the stopper of the side cover.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Replace the side cover open sensor Assy or deform the spring plate to normal shape.


4. Troubleshooting

11) LCD touch problem

•

Symptom

: During Ready or Job processing , Touch LCD does not work.

•

Cause

:

-

Touch screen panel calibration problem

-

Touch screen panel connection interface problem

-

UI PBA problem

•

Troubleshooting

1) Execute the touch screen calibration.

a) Turn off the machine.

b) While pressing the number 0 on numeric keys, turn the machine on. Wait until calibration screen appears.

c) Press centre of mark + following order 1~5. Use your finger. Perform 2 times.

d) If there is no problem, “Complete” will appear on LCD and reboot the machine. When making a mistake, start again from the step 1.

2) Check the touch screen panel flat cable connection on UI PBA.

3) If the connection is OK, replace the UI PBA with new one.


4-238

4. Troubleshooting

12) ACR fail problem

•

Symptom

: Set UI indicates ACR fail message.

•

Cause

: The brokenness of reflection mirror

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check the assembly condition inside of LSU.

2) If the reflection mirror is deviated, replace the LSU.


13) Loud noise sound of LSU motor

•

Symptom

: The machine makes some noise like a siren from LSU motor in printing mode.

•

Cause

: LSU motor defect

•

Troubleshooting

1) Enter the service mode and execute the LSU motor test.

2) If the LSU motor run sound is loud, replace the LSU.

3) If not, check the other unit.

4. Troubleshooting


4-240

4. Troubleshooting

14) Script error in Internet Explorer

•

Symptom

: Some script error occurs and the machine can not print anything. – IE 9 or later version.

•

Cause

: In protected mode, the “RegOpenCurrentUser” function with write authority returns error or access denied.

Can not write on the HKEY_CURRENT_USER registry.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Download the latest driver and install it.


15) Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper.

•

Symptom

: Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray can not pick up the paper.

•

Cause

:

-

Bad harness connection on the main board

-

Connector defect of the main board

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check the harness connection. If the harness is not connected correctly, reconnect it.

4. Troubleshooting

2) Check the connector 26 & 27 on main board.

If the connector has some problem of soldering, replace the main board.


4-242

4. Troubleshooting

16) Exit DADF Jam

•

Symptom

: When copy or scan images using DADF, exit jam is occurred even if there is no jam.

•

Cause

:

-

Exit actuator is not returned. (Low resetting force of exit actuator spring.)

•

Troubleshooting

1) Remove the DADF rear cover, DADF front cover, DADF cover-open Assy, Stacker.

(Refer to the disassembly chapter in service manual.)

2) Replace the exit actuator spring.


4. Troubleshooting

17) Paper source setting problem in Visio program

•

Symptom

: In Visio program, the setting of paper source is not affected though the paper source of print driver is changed to Tray1, Tray2 etc

•

Cause

:

-

Visio program set the source in application setting.

-

Application setting is have more priority than print driver setting (Another Vendor is same behavior)


4-244

4. Troubleshooting

•

Troubleshooting

1) Click the “Page setup” in file menu in Visio application.

2) Click the “Setup” button.

3) Change the Paper source which you want to use.


18) Acoustic noise in Fuser unit

•

Symptom

: Acoustic noise from fuser assembly in early stage of printing

•

Cause

: Fuser belt edges is damaged.

4. Troubleshooting

•

Troubleshooting

1) Replace the fuser unit with new one.


4-246

4. Troubleshooting

19) SMPS output voltage drop error

•

Symptom

: Some error messages occur on the OPE(C3-1312,S3-3121,M1-4111,M1-4211).

•

Cause

: 24V channels output voltage drop to under 21.6V and 5V channels output is normal.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether 24V voltage comes out or not.

2) If 24V voltage doesn’t come out, check ‘24V on/off signal pin’ on the main board.

a) The voltage at ‘24V on/off signal pin’ is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.

b) The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal.

3) If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts( i.e. Fuser, motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the SMPS.

4) If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect some harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the SMPS.

5) If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness, connector and main board.


20) HDD makes a loud noise.

•

Symptom

: The Hard Disk Drive makes a loud noise when working.

•

Cause

: HDD itself has defects.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Replace the HDD with new one.

4. Troubleshooting


4-248

4. Troubleshooting

21) Machine can not feed the paper.

•

Symptom

: The machine can not feed the paper from Tray1 or Tray2.

•

Cause

:

-

Feed motor problem

-

Feed motor connection problem

-

Main board defect

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check the Feed motor operation.

a) Open the side cover, and push the cover switch with paper forcibly.

b) Enter the service mode.

(Press the 1, 2, 3 keys simultaneously and enter the password (1934).) c) Select the menu below.

(EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > on/off )

Check the two feed rollers operating status.

4-249 d) If the feed rollers can not rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.


4. Troubleshooting

2) Check the connection between the main board(CN27) and feed motor.

3) If the problem persists, replace the main board.


4-250

4. Troubleshooting

22) Networking is not working.

•

Symptom

: Network is not working suddenly.

•

Cause

:

-

Network line itself is not working properly.

-

Network configuration is wrong.

-

Some related electronic components have the defect in the main board.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Do a ping test after connecting the network line which was used in the SET to a PC to check the network line itself.

2) Do a ping test after connecting the network line to the SET. If it is okay, check the network configuration which may set wrong by some users without notice.

3) If the result of the ping test is not good, then open the rear cover and see the main board if there are some visible defects on the network related components such as connector(CN16), capacitor(C192), and any other components nearby. Surge voltage from the outside may cause the defects.

4) If those components have visible defects, then the main board should be changed.


23) LCD is blinking when turning on the power.

•

Symptom

: LCD is blinking when turning on the power.

•

Cause

: OPE board defect

•

Troubleshooting

1) Check assembling the LCD harness.

2) Replace the OPE board with new one.

4. Troubleshooting


4-252

4. Troubleshooting

24) Device does not perform initial setup

•

Symptom

: Factory clear or memory clear is performed. Device does not perform initial setup after rebooting.

Firmware version with problem

-

UI : V5.08.10.04_20120605.19 or earlier

-

Main F/W: V11.11.06.02 06-29-2012 or earlier

•

Cause

: S/W defect

•

Troubleshooting

1) Turn off the device.

2) Open side cover.

3) Turn on the device as Power Key of UI is pressed.

4) Complete System Recovery (HDD format) and reboot the device.


4. Troubleshooting

25) TC Calibration Error Occurs

•

Symptom

:

The error shown below occurs when engine firmware V1.20.26 or later is applied:

-

C8-2210 (Y) / C8-3210 (M) / C8-4210 (C) /C8-5210 (K)

•

Troubleshooting

1) Download the PRN file from TSP site.

(

http://tsp.samsung.com > Knowledge > Technical Resource > Troubleshooting Guide > TG-12070009

)

2) Send the PRN file to the device.

ipsend: Ipsend IP_Address CLEAR_TC_CAL_ERROR.prn

Usblist2: Usblist2 CLEAR_TC_CAL_ERROR.prn

3) Wait about 10 seconds after sending PRN file. Perform Power Off and On.


4-254

4. Troubleshooting

26) How to adjust image distortion

•

Symptom

:

Image distortion occurs when paper is fed from DADF.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Loosen the 4 screws of the left hinge then loosen the 4 screws of the right side. Adjust the DADF.

2) Perform a copy job from the DADF and see if image distortion occurs. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if there is distortion.

3) If image distortion is removed then tighten the hinges’ screws.


4. Troubleshooting

27) Incorrect time setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish

•

Symptom

:

Time setting is incorrect after initial setting when a device's language is Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish.

•

Cause

:

Time is not correct by the same time length as the gap from GMT due to wrong time zone function.

•

Troubleshooting

During initial settings, change time zone to (GMT) UK before date and time setting.

1) If you select Chinese, French, Finnish, or Danish as the language from Initial Settings, you have to change the Time Zone to (GMT) UK before date and time setting.

2) Click "Timezone" during the Device Date/Time step of Initial Setting.

NOTE

Date and time setting should be done after timezone settings.

3) Select (GMT) UK.

4) Set date and time.

NOTE

If you have already done initial setting with these 4 languages, change Time Zone to (GMT) UK and set the date and time again from Machine Setup > General Settings > Date & Time > Date & Time.


4-256

4. Troubleshooting

28) 94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document

•

Symptom

:

94 mm periodic jitter occurs in printed document.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Perform a printout for each color with “Check Drum Prn” file.

2) Check the period of jitter with a ruler and figure out the type of fault.

3) Switch the organic photo conductor drum (OPC) with another OPC of another color.

If this resolves the problem, replace the OPC only.

4) Check the gear of the main drive is changed (damaged) or if there is an alien substance.

If the gear is changed (damaged) then replace the main drive.

If an alien substance is found then remove it.

5) Replace the imaging unit that causes the problem.


4. Troubleshooting

29) Line Skew occurs due to internal module of scanner

•

Symptom

:

Line skew occurs when platen copy is performed.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Open DADF. Remove 5 screws. Remove Scan glass.

2) Use vernier calipers to check & record difference between Front and Rear of FR Module from Scan left exterior.

3) Use vernier calipers to check & record difference between Front and Rear of HR Module from Scan left exterior.

4) As the result,

If difference of FR is +4 mm and HR is +2mm, (or -4 / -2), a) Remove pulley screw slightly with allen wrench with size 2mm.

b) Measure length from left-right exterior of FR module with vernier calipers and make it the same and lock it.

c) Make difference of left-right smaller than 0.5mm.

It is OK if difference is smaller than 1mm after locking the screw. (HR needs to be checked)

CAUTION

4 screws (2 front pulleys, 2 rear pulleys) need to be tightly locked. Need to be locked with 7kgf*cm torque.

If it is too strong then pulley can be broken, if it is too weak it can be unlocked.

-

If difference of FR is +4 mm and HR is -1mm ~ +1mm a) Where front screw is located when it is seen from the front of device. /

Where rear screw is located when it is seen from the rear of device.

b) Normally distance between head of screw and Heat Sink is about 1mm. Loosen screw and align FR.

Tighten screw and verify alignment with vernier calipers.


4-258

4. Troubleshooting

30) 706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs

•

Symptom

:

706 Error(Paper Jam) occurs while using Polaris inner finisher.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Refer to the guide from the TSP site.

(

http://tsp.samsung.com > Knowledge > Technical Resource > Troubleshooting Guide > TG-13020002

)


4. Troubleshooting

31) Image registration problem occurs after ACR (Auto Color Registration)

•

Symptom

:

Image registration problem occurs after ACR.

•

Cause

:

LSU (Laser Scanning Unit)

•

Troubleshooting

1) Perform ACR.

(Home > Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration)

2) Print ACR Report.

(Service Mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration)

Succeed or Failed for ACR: [1152] → Registration cannot be adjusted by ACR.

a) Check if Skew data of ACR Report is changed.

b) Check if OPC surface of Y/M/C is OK. → Check if it is scratched or torn.

c) Print and check separated Y/M/C color and see if it is OK.

d) Find “Succeeded or Failed for ACR” from ACR report.

If the value is 1152 like the above report, ACR cannot be done. LSU need to be replaced.

-

Succeeded or Failed for ACR: [0] → ACR was performed OK [OK]

Succeeded or Failed for ACR: [1] → ACR was not performed OK [Fail]


4-260

4. Troubleshooting

32) How to handle TRC error & ACR

•

Symptom

:

Abnormal color density (thick, thin) / Color registration is wrong.

•

Troubleshooting

1) If color density of print is wrong, perform TRC and print out TRC report.

2) Check the TRC error from the TRC report.

Mode column format :

▪

F = Full TRC

▪ S = Normal TRC

-

Error column format : 1X0 where the last digit indicates the color that is out of range.

▪ 1X0 : Sensed value from Y is abnormal.

▪

1X1 : Sensed value from M is abnormal.

▪ 1X2 : Sensed value from C is abnormal.

▪

1X3 : Sensed value from K is abnormal.

3) Check the followings for the corresponding color.

-

Check if the toner motor is working normally.

▪ Enter Tech Mode (press 1, 2, 3 simultaneously then type in 1934)

(Diagnostics > Engine > Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Toner Dispense Motor On/Off)

111-0000(Y), 111-0010(M), 111-0020(C), 111-0030(K)

Check if toner supply is blocked.

-

Check if toner seal is removed.

Check if the transfer roller is installed properly.

-

Print the ACR report. Check the ACR is succeeded.

Succeeded or Failed for

ACR

PWM of sensor LED

Skew

ACR Result

-

0 = Success

256 = LED calibration failed which is performed before ACR for pattern sensing.

→ ACR sensor is contaminated or ACR sensor is defective.

LED Calibration Result (LED value, max- 255, min – 0)

If ACR result is 256 and PWM value is 179 then it is a sensor fault or a control board fault.

Number of clicks to adjust for LSU skew

(Default: 200 → does not need to be adjusted) 7 clicks = 1 dot.

Too low - 190: needs to be adjusted counter-clockwise by 10 clicks

Too high - 210: needs to be adjusted clockwise by 10 clicks

If the value is between 193~217 then it does not need to be adjusted


4. Troubleshooting

33) Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF

•

Symptom

:

Paper Jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of DADF

When a document jam occurs during original document scanning, the registration sensor and spring tension need to be checked. Otherwise the Registration ROLLER-IDLE needs to be checked.

•

Cause

:

Screw was tightened too much during DADF COVER assembly. Cover plastic presses Registration ROLLER-IDLE and it cannot rotate smoothly, causing a paper jam.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Open DADF Cover.

2) Rotate “Registration ROLLER-IDLE” by hand.

At this time which is close to screw does not rotate smoothly and rotates smoothly.

3) If roller does not rotate smoothly, loosen screw until roller does rotate smoothly.

4) When loosening screw still does not allow roller to rotate well, remove DADF cover and scrape away contact point with a knife until roller rotates smoothly. Install DADF and adjust screw .

[How to perform above step 4] a) Remove the DADF cover.

b) Remove the DADF pick up Assy.

c) Use a razor knife to shave the cover area which is binding with the Registration ROLLER-IDLE.


4-262

4. Troubleshooting

34) Polaris Color - Removing debris from the Developer Unit.

•

Symptom

:

Line occurs on the paper moving direction.

•

Cause

:

Debris on developer unit causes line on print

•

Troubleshooting

1) Remove the developer unit.

(


)

2) Disassemble the developer unit cover (pay attention not to destroy lock) Empty developer out on clean paper.

3) Remove lumps with the Jig from mag roller.

4) Pay attention & clean the circled area where oil can cause build-up in the Fuser.


4. Troubleshooting

35) DADF is not recognized and an S3-3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from the platen.

•

Symptom

:

-

DADF installation is not recognized.

-

Polaris Color Model (which has HDD) - S3-3211 error occurs and copy must be performed using the platen.

-

Polaris Monochrome Model - copy must be performed using the platen.

•

Cause

:

DADF power cable fails.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Reassemble the DADF power cable and if it does not solve the problem, replace the cable (

JC39-01867A

)

2) Adjust harness and make it fixed with cable tie.


4-264

4. Troubleshooting

36) The ADF does not recognize a piece of paper.

•

Symptom

: An original document does not feed when loaded on the ADF. (Scan is started from platen glass.)

•

Troubleshooting

1) Open the DADF cover-open

2) Pull the DADF pick up Assy to the front.

3) Remove the old STOPPER.

4) Assemble the new STOPPER.


4. Troubleshooting

37) Blur occurs on Color printout

•

Symptom

: Blur occurs on the color printout.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Enter EDC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.

2) Select [T2 Control Mode].

3) Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction)

4) Raise value for T2 PWM and see if blur problem is resolved.

5) When the problem persists after changing the [T2 Control Mode] values , change the [T1 Control Mode] values.

6) Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.

In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.

7) As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.


4-266

4. Troubleshooting

38) "toner cartridge is not installed." error occurs

•

Symptom

:

Error Report shows “Toner Not Install (C1-x411)”

-

C1-5411 - “Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”

-

C1-2411 - “Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”

-

C1-3411 - “Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”

-

C1-4411 - “Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it”

•

Cause

:

Toner does not fit in the device as the size of the toner container is too small.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Change the parts below.

Toner Catridge Latch(Black) : JC96–08350A

-

Toner Catridge Latch(Cyan) : JC96–08349A

Toner Catridge Latch(Magenta) : JC96–08347A

-

Toner Catridge Latch(Yellow) : JC96–08348A


39) The soft keyboard window doesn't display in ACR

•

Symptom

:

Soft Keyboard is not shown when ACR is configured.

•

Troubleshooting

1) Procedure a) Go to service mode.

b) Do not use the soft keyboard when logging on to the service mode.

c) Click the Editbox of ACR.

d) Confirm Keyboard.

2) Root Cause a) The Keyboard type of ACR editbox is set up in the wrong way b) There is no default settings value of the Keyboard.

3) Resolution a) Setting the defined keyboard value.

i) Before

4. Troubleshooting ii) After

4) Self-solution a) Click editbox when logging in.


4-268

4. Troubleshooting


5. System Diagram

5. System Diagram

CN18

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

®® ¥¥ ¢¢ ¤¤ ¢¢

¥¥ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ¢¢

®® ½½ ££ ££

®® ££ ®® ¡¡ ¨¨

®® ®® ¨¨ ®® §§ ££

oo

oo

oo

®® ½½ ®® ¨¨ ®® ££

®® ½½ ££ ££ ®® ¢¢ ©©

®® ½½ ££ ££ ®® ¡¡

®® ½½

®®

®®

½½ ¡¡ ¢¢ ££

¦¦ ¤¤

½½ ¦¦ ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¡¡

¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ½½ ¢¢ ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

¢¢ ®®

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

¢¢ ®®

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¤¤ ¢¢ oo °° ±± »»´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

oo

oo

oo

CN7

®®

®®

½½ ¡¡ ¢¢ ££

CN13

oo

oo

oo

oo

¦¦ ¤¤

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

½½ ¦¦ ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN35

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ½½ ¢¢ ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¢¢

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

oo

oo

¢¢ ®®

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

¢¢ ®®

¢¢ ££ oo ¢¢ ¸¸¶¶ ½½ °° »»

¢¢ ££ oo ¾¾ ÆÆ ´´ ÁÁ

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN20

¢¢ ££ ®® ££ §§ ®®

¢¢ ££ ®® ££ §§ ®®

¢¢ ££ ®® ¡¡ §§ ®®

¢¢ ££ ®® ¡¡ §§ ®®

oo

oo

oo

CN2

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

CN34

½½ ¡¡ ¢¢ ££ ®®

®® ££ §§

®® ¡¡ §§

½½ ®® ¡¡ ®®

½½ ££ ££ ®®

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

CN36

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

½½ ¡¡ ¢¢ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ££ §§

¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¡¡ §§

½½ ®® ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ££ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

½½ ¶¶ ¸¸½½ ´´ uu

°° ¸¸½½

CN22

¥¥ ®®

½½ ££ ££ ®® ££ ®® ¢¢

¥¥ ®®

££ ®® ¡¡ oo

®® ¥¥

££ ®® ¡¡ oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

¥¥ ®®

££ ®® ¡¡ oo

®® ¥¥

££ ®® ¡¡ oo

££

££

CN15

££ ®®

¥¥ ®® ¡¡

££ ®® ¢¢

££ ®®

££ ®®

££ ®® ¢¢

££ ®®

¥¥ ®® ¡¡

££ ®®

¥¥ ®® ¡¡

££ ®® ¢¢

££ ®®

®® ¡¡ ®® ££

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

¡¡ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

££ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

¡¡ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

££ ´´ ¼¼ ¿¿ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¡¡

½½ ®® ¥¥ ®® ¢¢ ¢¢ ®®

©© ¡¡ ®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¢¢ ®®

®® ®® ¡¡ ¨¨

¥¥

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¡¡ ¨¨

¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¥¥

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

¢¢ ¢¢ oo °° ½½

°° ¿¿ ´´ ÁÁooÂÂ ¸¸ÉÉ ´´ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

°° ¿¿ ´´ ÁÁooÂÂ ¸¸ÉÉ ´´ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

ÄÄ ¼¼ ¸¸³³ ¸¸ÃÃÈÈ ooÂÂ ´´ ½½ ÂÂ ¾¾ ÁÁ

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¢¢ ¢¢

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN30

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥

CN4

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

©© ¡¡ ®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¢¢ ®®

®® ®® ¡¡ ¨¨

¥¥

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¡¡ ¨¨

¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¥¥

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®®

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¢¢

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¢¢

½½ ®® ¥¥ ®® ¢¢ ¢¢ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

®® ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

®® ¡¡ ®® ¢¢ ©©

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

®® ¤¤ ££ ®® ££

®® ¤¤ ££ ®® ¤¤

®® ¥¥ ¢¢

CN17

¥¥ ®®

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

½½ ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ££ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ££ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ££ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ££ ®® ¤¤ ££

££ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¡¡

££ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¡¡

££ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

££ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÁÁ°° ÆÆ

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¥¥ ®®

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

½½ ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

oo ´´ ½½ ÃÃ´´ ÁÁ

oo ¢¢

££ ¡¡ oo ££ ¡¡

££ ¡¡ oo ¢¢

¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡


5-1

5. System Diagram

°° ¸¸½½

¡¡ ¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN32

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥

¥¥

½½ ¶¶ ¸¸½½ ´´ uu

°° ¸¸½½

CN12

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ¥¥

CN40

oo ¥¥ ®®

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¡¡

CN10

®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

®® §§ ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ££

®® ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®® ££

½½ ®® ®® ££

®® ®® ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ££

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¢¢

½½ ¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¢¢

®® ££

½½ ®® ££

½½ ®® ££

®® ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥

¥¥

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®®

®® ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®®

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

CN38

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

¦¦

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®® ££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁoo

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®® ££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁoo

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁoo

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ££ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁoo

££ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

®® ¥¥ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

¢¢ ®® ¡¡ ¤¤ ®® ££ ££

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁ

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁ

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁ

££ ¾¾ ½½ ´´ ÁÁ

¨¨

CN39

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

££ ®® ¥¥

¥¥

££ ¢¢ ®® ¥¥ ££

®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

®® §§ ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ££

®® ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®® ££

½½ ®® ®® ££

®® ®® ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ££

¥¥

¥¥

¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¢¢

½½ ¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¢¢

®® ££

½½ ®® ££

½½ ®® ££

®® ££

¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¥¥

¥¥

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡

¡¡ ®® ®®

®® ®®

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ®®

½½ ®® ®®

®® ®®

¡¡ ®® ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

®® ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®®

®® ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®®


¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¨¨

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¨¨

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®®

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

®®

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

CN27

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¨¨

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££ ¨¨

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ££

½½ ¡¡ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®®

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

®®

¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££

½½ ¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££

®® ¥¥ ¢¢ ¤¤ ¢¢

½½ ££ ££ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®® ¢¢ ££

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®® ¥¥

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

½½ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

½½ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN23

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££

½½ ¥¥ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££

®® ¥¥ ¢¢ ¤¤ ¢¢

½½ ££ ££ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®® ¢¢ ££

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®® ¥¥

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££ ®®

¥¥ ®®

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

½½ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

½½ ®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

®® ¦¦ ¢¢ ££

¢¢ ¤¤

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

½½ ££ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥

¥¥

½½ ¢¢ ££ ¡¡ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ££

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

oo

CN11

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

½½ ££ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥

¥¥

½½ ¢¢ ££ ¡¡ ££ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¡¡ ¨¨ ®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®®

®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

®® ¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ££

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

¢¢ ¤¤ ®® ®® ¦¦ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ®® ®® ¤¤ ££

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¢¢ ¨¨ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

½½ ¥¥ ®®

5. System Diagram

CN19

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® §§ ££

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ®® ¤¤ ®® §§ ££

®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

®® §§ ££

¦¦ ®® ¡¡ ££ ¤¤ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ §§

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® §§ ££

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ®® ¤¤ ®® §§ ££

½½ ££ ££ ®® §§ ££

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ®® ¤¤ ®® §§ ££

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ

®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

½½ ®® §§ ££

®® §§ ££

¦¦ ®® ¡¡ ££ ¤¤ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ §§

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® §§ ££

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ®® ¤¤ ®® §§ ££

vv½½ ³³

§§ ££

½½ ¶¶ ¸¸½½ ´´ uu

°° ¸¸½½

CN26

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ¡¡ ®® ®® ££ ¨¨

¦¦ ®® ®® ¢¢

¥¥

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¥¥ ®® ¢¢

½½ ¡¡ ®® ®® ££ ¨¨

¦¦ ®® ®® ¢¢

¥¥

®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

½½ ®® ¤¤

®® ¤¤

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ££

¢¢

¦¦

¦¦

¦¦

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ¤¤ ¡¡

¥¥ ®®

½½ ¡¡ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤

¤¤ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤ §§

½½ ££ ££ ®® ®® ¤¤

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

oo

CN25

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

½½ ®®

¦¦ ®® ®® ¡¡

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

¦¦ ®® ¢¢ ¦¦

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥ ®®

®® ££ ¥¥ ®®

®® ¥¥ ¢¢ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

CN37

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

oo

ÆÆ ¸¸ÁÁ´´

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

½½ ®®

¦¦ ®® ®® ¡¡

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¤¤ ¢¢ ¡¡ ®® ¢¢

¦¦ ®® ¢¢ ¦¦

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥ ®®

®® ££ ¥¥ ®®

®® ¥¥ ¢¢ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ¥¥ ®®

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ££ ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

¦¦ ®® ®® ¥¥

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

½½ ®®

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

®® ££ ¥¥

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®®

¥¥ ®® ®® ¢¢ ¤¤

¥¥ ¢¢


5-3

5. System Diagram

CN

2

LED

1

2

CN

3

LED

1

2

||

||

1

2

¦¦ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££ oo

1

2

¦¦ ®® ®® ¡¡ ££ oo

MAIN P BA

SCAN_MTR_MS1 nEN_ SCAN_MTR

SCAN_MTR_PLS

PWM_ WHITE_ LED nFLAT _COVER _OPEN 2 nFLAT _COVER _OPEN 1 nCCD_ HOME nAPS _ SENSOR2 nAPS _ SENSOR1 nDETECT_ DADF nDETECT_ PAPER _DADF nSCAN_ READ

DADF_ TXD

DADF_ RXD nRST_ DADF

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

3.3 VLP

DGND

5V1 _WRKSRC_SCAN

DGND

5V1 _LP

5V1 _LP

DGND

24 V4

24 V4

24 V4

24 V4

SCAN_MTR_MS2

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

21

22

23

24

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

||

SCAN_ MTR_ MS1

21

20

19

18

26

25

24

23

22

1

31

30

29

28

27

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

3 .3V

DGND

5 VS

DGND

5 V

5 V

DGND nEN _SCAN_ MTR

SCAN_ MTR_ PLS

PWM_WLED_ CTL nFLAT _ COVER_ OPEN2 nFLAT _ COVER_ OPEN1 nCCD_HOME nAPS _SENSOR 2 nAPS _SENSOR 1 nDADF_ DETECT nPAPER _DETECT nSCAN _READ

TXD_ DADF

RXD_ DADF nRST _DADF

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

SCAN_ MTR_ MS2

CN3

SCAN MOTOR nB_SCAN_ MTR

24 V

B_ SCAN_MTR

A_ SCAN_MTR

24 V nA_SCAN_ MTR

1

2

3

4

5

6

S CAN J OINT P BA

6

5

4

3

2

1

SCAN MOTOR

(BIPOLAR STEP

MOTOR)

5-4

BLDC MOTOR

4

3

6

5

2

1

9

8

7

||

5

6

7

8

9

3

4

CN7

PICKUP_ REGI MOTOR CONN

1 FGCK1

2 HW1

HV1

HU1

DGND

3.3 V

W1

V1

U1

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

CLUTCH

CLUTCH

1

2

1

2

1

3

2

||

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

CN13

SCAN READ /CLUTCH

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _SCAN

24 V

PICKUP _CLUTCH

24 V

REGI_CLUTCH

7

8

5

6

9

1

0

3

4

1

2

CN2

MINICUBE2 nRESET

SOF 3_ DEBUG

3 .3V

SIF 3_ DEBUG

NSCKF3 _DEBU

G

HS_ DEBUG

FLMD1

FLMD0

-

DADF P BA

5 V

CN7

PAPER SIZE SENSOR

DGND

NSENS _P _LENGTH 1

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _LENGTH 2

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _WIDTH1

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _WIDTH2

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _WIDTH3

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

4

5

6

1

2

3

||

CN6

5 V PAPER DRIVING SENSOR

DGND

NSENS _P _REGI

5 V

1

2

3

4

DGND

COVER OPEN

5 V

DGND

NDETECT_PAPER _DAD

F

7

8

5

6

9

||

5 V

DGND

CN8

EXIT IDLE SENSOR

NSENS _EXIT _ IDLE

1

2

3

||

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

3

2

2

1

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

3

2

1

3

2

2

1

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

3

2

1

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

CN9

EXIT SENSOR

5 V

DGND

NSENS _P _EXIT

1

2

3

||

3

2

1

PHOTO

INTERRUPTER

CN10

EXIT SOLENOID

24 V

PWM_EXIT _SOL

1

2

2

1

SOLENOID


6. Reference Information

6. Reference Information

This chapter contains the tools list, list of abbreviations used in this manual, and a guide to the location space required when installing the printer. A definition of test pages and Wireless Network information definition is also included.

6.1. Tools for Troubleshooting

The following tools are recommended safe and easy troubleshooting as described in this service manual.

Tool

Hand DVM

Image Use

Checking the fuser lamp.

Checking the SMPS fuse.

Remark

Service

Spring hook

Small vacuum

Driver

Tweezers

Soft cloth

Black soft cloth

Install guide, User guide,

Admin guide

Software CD

When disassembling the spring

To remove the toner and contamination inside of the machine.

To tighten screws.

To remove the hinge of the cover.

Service

Service

Service

To unplug the pin connector of the fuser unit.

To remove the E-ring.

To clean the rollers

To clean the frame and scan glass

Service

Service

To cover the OPC drum Service

When installing the machine.

When installing the machine.

Installation

Installation


6-1


Tool

Test Chart

•

A4 image, A3 image,

Skew

Image

Spare Kit

• Screw, E-Ring

Clamp

Grease

Use

To check the image quality

To fix the unit or parts

Remark

Service

Service

To form the harness Service

To remove the noise by gear.

• G-8050 : JC81–08663A (200g)

• SPY272 : JC81–08664A (100g)

Service



6.2. Glossary

The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide and service manual.

802.11

802.11b/g/n

Access point

ADF

AppleTalk

BIT Depth

BMP

BOOTP

CCD

Collation

Control Panel

Coverage

CSV

DADF

Default

DHCP

DIMM

802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11

Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.

An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white.

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.

Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.

This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The

BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.

A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed.

They are typically found in front of the machine.

It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.

Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.


6-3


DLNA

DNS

Dot Matrix Printer

DPI

DRPD

Duplex

Duty Cycle

ECM

Emulation

Ethernet

EtherTalk

FDI

FTP

Fuser Unit

Gateway

Grayscale

Halftone

HDD

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network.

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.

A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.

Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.

Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.

A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).

The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a fuser belt and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.

A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.

An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.


IEEE

IEEE 1284

Intranet

IP address

IPM

IPP

IPX/SPX

ISO

ITU-T

ITU-T No. 1 chart

JBIG

JPEG

LDAP

LED

MAC address

MFP

MH

MMR


The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).

A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones.

IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.

The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.

Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.

A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e.

g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.

Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.


6-5

PABX

PCL

PDF

PostScript(PS)

Printer Driver

Print Media

PPM

PRN file

Protocol

PSTN


Modem

MR

NetWare

OPC

Originals

OSI

RADIUS

Resolution

SMB

6-6

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted.

A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.

An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for

Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,

Data Link and Physical.

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise.

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers,

PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.

Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.

A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.

The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access.

The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated

Interprocess communication mechanism.


TWAIN

UNC Path

URL

USB

SMTP

SSID

Subnet Mask

TCP/IP

TCR

TIFF

Toner Cartridge

Watermark

WEP

WIA

WPA

WPA-PSK


Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet.

SMTP is a relatively simple, text based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.

Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters.

The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address.

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.

An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a

TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture

API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet.

The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another.

Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in

Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIAcompliant scanner.

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.

WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.


6-7


WPS

XPS

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer.

XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-independent document format.



6.3. Polaris Training Frequently Asked Questions

< Index >

1) Training material shows different warm-up times from that of product specification.

2) Why is an ozone filter present in SCX-8128 Series, and not in CLX-9301 Series?

3) Is the initialization process such as color calibration necessary after initial set-up?

4) Why is Tray1 unable to accommodate A3/ledger size?

5) What is AMPV of CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series?

6) Why is wireless connectivity not supported on Polaris models?

7) Can you use a drum beyond its life expectancy?

8) Cosmos produces copies almost identical to originals, but Polaris shows deviation in color feel. Copy is more frequently used than image print.

9) You say that power consumption is lower than competitors’ copiers, but how low is it compared to other electronic products?

10) Is Polaris’ durability good?

11) According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual printable sheet count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge lifecycle?

12) What can happen if I add documents to the DADF while it is in use?

13) Is it possible to disable ACR ?

14) Can you install a 3rd party HDD drive to these machines?

15) For Polaris Mono Models, HDD is not a default option. Are storage related functions not supported? What features are not supported?

16) When copying, can mono print be set as default color mode?

17) Compared to HP, oblique lines/thin lines and gray did not show properly. Is this improved in Polaris?

18) Do CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series support Super A3(SRA3) paper format?

19) Information on CRU, FRU & PM Parts lifecycle?

20) Will an empty toner cartridge or service item at end-of-life cause a hard error?

21) Can you print/copy if any one of the toner cartridges is empty?

22) Can the interval at which you receive an end-of-life message for service items be changed?

23) Will the machine display a hard error code when a service item reaches it expected life?

24) Will you receive a warning when a consumable or service item is nearing it’s life expectancy?

25) How is consumable an service item life tracked?

26) Will I lose counter information if the main board is replaced?

27) What is the interchangeable Drum Unit’s advantage?

28) What are the environment test conditions?

29) Do all Polaris models of Polaris support XOA?


6-9


30) HDD is option for SCX-8128 Series. Who is the target customer and what is the benfit of installing an HDD to this series?

31) It is hard to separate faxes from copies because they are stacked in the same tray.

32) Can I move the shortcuts for copy/scan/fax to a specific page of the home screen?

33) Is there automatic paper size detection in a MP tray?

34) Is there a force-firmware mode for Polaris?

35) Does Polaris mono ship with the HDD SATA and power cables or will the connections come with the optional HDD?

< Answers >

Question No.1

Training material shows different warm-up times from that of product specification.

Answer Polaris warm-up time and booting time are as below.

•

•

Warm-up(Sleep To Ready) : Polaris Color 25 sec/Mono 25 sec

Booting Time(Power on to Ready) : Polaris Color 34 sec/Mono 25 sec

NOTE

Reference The Detail Specification Sheet

Question No.2

Why is an ozone filter present in SCX-8128 Series (Mono), and not in CLX-9301 Series (Color)?

Answer Corona charging method is non-contact type which emits ions generated by

Corona-discharging in air to OPC surface. In this process, ozone (ions) is generated in developer unit area. After charging process, ozone filter collects ozone from developer unit. On the other hand, contact charging type like roller-charging has no need to implement ozone filter, because there is no ozone produced in developer unit.

※

Charging type

Reference Service Manual 2.5.2 Imaging Unit



Question No.3

Is the initialization process, such as color calibration necessary after initial set-up?

Answer

Reference

When setting up initially, initializing process like TRC, ACR calibration is automatically performed. So there is no need for the installer to do an extra initializing run.

But installer should manually adjust LSU Skew in case of left and right color-registration misalignment.

Please refer to Service Manual for details.

•

•

Calibration process in Polaris color : TRC ->ACR

Calibration process in Polaris mono : No TRC, ACR

* Service Manual 4.4.5.6 Image Management

1) ACR(Auto Color Registration)

2) MCR(Manual Color Registration)

3) TRC(Auto Color Tone Adjustment)

Question No.4

Why is Tray 1 unable to accommodate A3/ledger size?

Answer In order to reduce the size of machine, MP Pick-up/Feeding Unit is moved inside the unit. It takes some space of tray 1 area so it is shorter / narrower. (Percentage of A3 users: below 2%). It is able to feed A3 format from tray2 by default.

※

Canon C2020 uses same method.

Reference

Question No.5

What is AMPV of CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series?

Answer Recommended AMPV is as follows.

Reference Service Manual 2.2.1 General Specification

Question No.6

Why is wireless connectivity not supported on Polaris models?

Answer Stats show only about 1% of the users select wireless options.

Reference

Question No.7

Can you use a drum beyond its life expectancy?

Answer Drum Cartridge has no machine stop. So it is possible to use Drum Cartridge after end of life if there is no problem with image quality. But if you want to limit Drum Cartridge's usage until its life cycle to ensure image quality, you can turn-on the EIUL (End of Imaging Unit Life) function in service mode. And then machine will stop after Drum Cartridge's end of life.

※

Polaris Color and Mono each ensures image quality until 50k (Color), 100k (Mono) impressions.

Reference Service Manual 2.2.8 Consumables


6-11


Question No.8

Cosmos produces copies almost identical to originals, but Polaris shows deviation in color feel. Copy is more frequently used than image print.

Answer It is a problem that happens in initial products. And it was resolved by correcting of CMS table giving similar color feel to Cosmos.

※

You can use color simulation function to control color feel when you print.

Reference

Question No.9

You say that power consumption is lower than competitors’ copiers, but how low is it compared to other electronic products?

Answer

•

•

•

•

•

•

For reference, power consumptions at power save are as follows:

•

•

Polaris power consumption : 1.1-1.6W (Power save mode)

Set-top box : 12.3 W

TV : 1.3 W

Internet Modem : 6 W

Stand Air-conditioner : 5.8 W

•

Heater : 5.8 W

Audio Speaker : 5.6 W

Home Theater : 5.1 W

Video : 4.9 W

•

•

Computer : 2.6 W

General Printers : 2.2 W

It is useful to say that our product is highly efficient in electricity consumption comparing to competitors’, but it is better to point out just how good it is compared to other electric products, so they can compare it to other devices as well.

Reference We received inputs that compared to HP auto on/off, Samsung’s Sleep Mode Power does not show much difference.

HP CP1025 model specifies under 1W electricity consumption at Auto Off. Samsung CLP-365 also specifies under 1W at Sleep Mode, so there is no real advantages in Power Consumption.

Question

No.10

Answer

Is Polaris’ durability good?

You can refer to the test result of the Buyer’s Lab.


Question

No.10

Reference

Is Polaris’ durability good?


Question No.11

According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual printable sheet count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge lifecycle?

Answer For Copiers, Color uses 5 % BLI Patterns, and Mono uses 6 % BLI Patterns.

Minimum baseline for lifecycle is defined such as test conditions, set count, imaging unit count, etc.

In Korea, this Spec. is inspected by a third-party. Korea Customer Agency conducts its own tests, and if it does not meet the Spec, it requests the company to rectify the spec.

In Toner Save Mode, it is saved up to approximately. 20 % and text only mode may be used by printing after activating Save Mode. Configure Method: Eco Button Press, Default setting change in EPM and SWS.


6-13


Question No.11

According to experience with previous models, lifecycle of Toner Cartridge is satisfactory, but actual printable sheet count seems lower than that of competitors. Is there a baseline for Toner Cartridge lifecycle?

Reference

< BLI Color 5% Pattern >

< BLI Mono 6% Pattern >

6-14

Question

No.12

Answer

Reference

What can happen if I add documents to the DADF while it is in use?

It may cause skew or jams to DADF


Question

No.13

Answer

Is it possible to disable ACR?

•

•

Yes, it may be disabled. It can be disabled per each execution condition.

But it is not recommended because default setting comes optimized.

•

Page: 200 ~ 5000 (Default: 500)

LSU Temp: 1 ~ 100 (Default: 3 degree Celsius)

Ambient Temp: 1 ~ 100 (Default: 4)

NOTE

ACR Operating Time


Reference

Question

No.14

Answer

Reference

Service Manual 4.4.5.6 Image Management

Can you install a 3rd party HDD to these machines?

Since compatibility test has not been performed, it may cause problems to the unit. Samsung does not provide service support for unauthorized modifications to the device.

Question

No.15

Answer

Reference

Question

No.16

Answer

Reference

For Polaris Mono 23/28 PPM Models, HDD is not a default option. Are storage related functions not supported? What features are not supported

If there is no HDD, Share Folder function is not supported.

FAX's storage size reduction from 157 GB on HDD to 4 MB on flash memory. But 4 MB is enough because

80 sheets FAXs is as 1 MB by ITU-T No.1 Chart standard.

Service Manual 2.2.3 Controller and Software Specification, Service Guide

When copying, can mono print be set as default color mode? It needs to be fixed even after power

On/Off.

Default settings may be modified in Machine Setup. Alternatively, ‘Short Cut’ feature may be used to create custom default setting. User Authorities must be configured through Job Account to prevent them from changing settings.

It may be changed in Copy Setting within Machine Setup.

Detailed location is as follows: "

1. Menu overview and advanced features > Machine setup > Other settings > application settings > Copy Settings > Color Mode" value: Auto > Mono

”.

Then, the setting change will remain even after power On/Off. This only changes the default setting, but users still can change the setting before starting the jobs.

Search in Admin Guide By “Color Mode”

Question

No.17

Answer

Reference

Compared to HP, oblique lines/thin lines and gray did not show properly. Is this improved in Polaris?

Oblique lines/Thin lines expression has been much improved, and it is currently equal to HP or better.

Implementation of ReCP Technology (Edge Enhancement for Clean Page : Thin line expression improvement, Resolution Enhancement : Oblique line expression improvement)


6-15


Question

No.18

Answer

Reference

Question

No.19

Answer

Do CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series support the Super A3 (SRA3) paper format?

CLX-9301 Series and SCX-8128 Series do not support the Super A3(SRA3) paper format. Banner print is not supported either.

※

SRA3: Supplementary Raw Type A3

(Service Manual 2.2.7 Paper Handling Specification)

Polaris Specification : Ledger, A3, Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A3, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive,

A5, Statement, Custom

Information on CRU, FRU and PM Parts life cycle?

•

CLX-9201/9251/9301 series

•

SCX-8123/8128 series

6-16

Reference Service Manual 2.2.8 Consumables



Question

No.20

Answer

Will an empty toner cartridge or service item at end-of-life cause a hard error?

•

•

There is no machine stop in consumables or PM part except Toner Cartridge.

Toner Cartridges become Hard Stop mode when Toner Cartridge is empty.

If there is no machine stop in Toner cartridge, developer unit will be out of control due to toner density error.

Reference

Question

No.21

Answer

Can you print/copy if any one of the toner cartridges is empty?

No. If one of the color Toner cartridges become Hard Stop mode, the engine is not working.

Both Cosmos and Polaris have the same Hard Stop algorithm.

So In case of Hard Stop, both engines are not working.

Reference

Question

No.22

Answer

Reference

Question

No.23

Answer

Can the interval at which you receive an end-of-life message for service items be changed?

All the PM parts including consumables have default warning time. And it can be adjusted in the range

5-30% in 1% increments (Threshold).

Service Manual 4.4.3.2 Supply Status

Will the machine display a hard error code when a service item reaches it expected life?

Consumables and PM part except Toner Cartridge have no Hard Stop mode. So they can work regardless of machine's malfunction. On the other hand, because Toner Cartridge has Hard Stop mode to protect engine from error, It is not allowed that User removes the Hard Stop mode of Toner Cartridge.

Reference

Question

No.24

Answer

Will you receive a warning when a consumable or service item is nearing it’s life expectancy?

Toner Cartridge brings pre-warning up based on the life information of its memory and there is machine stop mode. OPC unit brings pre-warning up based on the life information of its memory and there is no machine stop mode. PM Parts except Toner, — and OPC brings pre-warning up based on the life information of machine memory and there is no machine stop mode.

Service Manual 4.4.3.2 Supply Status (Pre-Warning Information) Reference

Question

No.25

Answer

How is consumable an service item life tracked?

Toner Cartridge and Drum Units record life-cycle information in its memory.

And PM Parts records life-cycle information based on page count in machine memory.

Reference

Question

No.26

Answer

Will I lose counter information if the main board is replaced?

No, you will not. Life cycle information of machine is recorded on MSOK in a slot of main board. And you should use existing MSOK even after the main board replacement. So life-cycle information is unaffected by main board replacement.

※

MSOK: Master System Operator Key

Reference


6-17


6-18

Reference

Question

No.31

Answer

Reference

Question

No.32

Answer

Question

No.27

Answer

Reference

Question

No.28

Answer

What are the environment test conditions?

•

•

•

•

HH(High temperature and humidity): 30

℃

, 85%

LL(Low temperature and humidity): 10

℃

, 10%

NN(Normal temperature and humidity): 23

℃

, 55%

Cycle Test : 15

℃

15% ↔ 26

℃

20% ↔ 20

℃

10% ↔ 26

℃

80% ↔ 23

℃

55%

Reference

Question

No.29

Answer

Do all Polaris models support XOA?

All Polaris Color models (CLX-9301NA, CLX-9251NA, CLX-9201NA) support XOA. But only

SCX-8128NX supports XOA among Polaris Mono models. SCX-8128NA and SCX-8123NA do not support

XOA.

Reference

Question

No.30

Answer

What is the interchangeable Drum Unit’s advantage?

Users generally use Black image more than color yellow, magenta, and cyan when they are printing. So users can delay replacement cycle of black drum unit by interchanging black with color Drum Unit. Spare Drum

Units' storage such as money and space is minimized to one unit only.

HDD is option for SCX-8128 Series. Who is the target customer and what is the benefit of installing an HDD to this series?

If the HDD is not installed in SCX-8128 Series, it does not support the Shared Folder, Job Log and HDD

Spooling because that function need huge data memory. But general function that Scan to E-mail/SMB/FTP is supported by using RAM. In case of FAX, it uses 4 MB flash memory without HDD. 4 MB is enough because 80 sheets FAXs is 1 MB as ITU-T No.1 Chart standard.

Therefore, the target customer is

1) The customer who must save and scan the job log; government or security concerning company.

2) The customer who wants to use device as a file server.

3) The customer who wants print in LINUX and UNIX environment. LINUX and UNIX's print process is to print after store whole job to HDD.

4) The customer who sends/receives FAXES more than 200 sheets at one time.

It is hard to separate faxes from copies because they are stacked in the same tray.

You can separate faxes from copies by installing Job Separator (CLX-JST100). Then you can print faxes to basic stacker and copies to inner tray respectively.

Can I move the shortcuts for copy/scan/fax to a specific page of the home screen?

No, you cannot. It is possible to adjust the priority of functions like copy and scan. But it will be made possible by a firmware update.

※

Setting: Machine setup > General Settings > Home Settings > Priority

Reference



Question

No.33

Answer

Is there automatic paper size detection in a MP tray?

There is no automatic paper size detection in a MP tray. You should manually select the MP tray's paper format of the original.

※

Setting: Machine Setup > Tray Settings > Settings > MP Tray

Reference

Question

No.34

Answer

Reference

Is there a force-firmware mode for Polaris?

There is a force-firmware mode for Polaris Color only. You can go into force-firmware mode by turning on the machine while opening the front door and right door and pushing the power button.

Question

No.35

Answer

Reference

Does Polaris mono ship with the HDD SATA and power cables or will the connections come with the optional HDD?

The SATA cable and power cable are shipped with the optional HDD package. So you should assemble those cables on the main board when you install the HDD.

Service Manual 3.3.32.1 Installing the HDD


6-19

GSPN (GLOBAL SERVICE PARTNER NETWORK)

Area Web Site

Europe, MENA,

CIS, Africa

E.Asia, W.Asia,

China, Japan https://gspn1.samsungcsportal.com

https://gspn2.samsungcsportal.com

N.America, S.America

https://gspn3.samsungcsportal.com

This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

Any unauthorized use of Manual can be punished under applicable International and/or domestic law.

© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.

All rights reserved.

Printed in Korea

Code No.: